Resolve conflicts professionally and protect your peace
Complete Career & Work Planning Guide Collection
476 planning questions and 32 expert readings across 10 guides.
Planning Questions
Write about 3 specific moments in the past year when you felt energized at work. What were you doing? Who were you with? What made those moments different from your typical day?
Document the last time you dreaded going to work. What specific task, person, or situation triggered it? When did this pattern start?
Reflect on the last 5 times you said "I wish I could..." about work. Write down each statement and when you said it. What pattern emerges?
Think about your Sunday nights over the past 3 months. What specific feeling comes up about Monday? Rate each Sunday 1-10 for dread vs excitement.
List 5 projects or tasks from your career where you lost track of time. For each: What year? What were you creating? Why did time disappear?
Write about a time you felt proud of your work in the past 2 years. What specifically made you proud? Who did you tell first? Why that person?
Document what you complained about at work in the past month. Write down 5-10 specific complaints. Which ones are about the job vs the field itself?
Reflect on conversations where you said "I'm thinking about a career change." Who did you tell? What did saying it out loud feel like?
Think back to when you first chose your current career path. What did you believe about it then? What would you tell that version of yourself now?
Write about 3 people whose careers you envy. For each: What specifically do you envy? Their day-to-day, status, income, or something else?
Write about the last 3 times in the past year when you felt most energized and "in flow" at work. What were you doing? Who were you working with? What made those moments feel different from your regular workday?
Reflect on a typical Monday morning over the past 3 months. Write down the specific thoughts or feelings you have about starting your work week. When did this pattern start? What does it tell you about your current work situation?
Document 3-5 moments in your career when you had complete control over HOW you did your work (not just what you did). What did you choose to do differently? How did that autonomy feel?
Think about the last time you worked with a difficult colleague, manager, or client. Write down what made it difficult. Now reflect: would this situation exist if you could choose who you work with?
List the last 5 times you've talked about money or negotiated price in any context (work salary, freelance rate, splitting bills, buying something). Which felt comfortable? Which felt awkward? What pattern do you notice about your relationship with pricing your own value?
Reflect on your past 6 months of work. Write about 2-3 projects where YOU made the key decisions vs. projects where you executed someone else's decisions. Which type of work energized you more? What does that tell you?
Document a time in the past year when you had an idea for how to do something better but couldn't implement it due to company constraints. What was the idea? What stopped you? What would you have done differently if you'd had full control?
Think about your childhood or early career. Write about a time when you created something or started something from scratch (could be a lemonade stand, school project, side hustle, anything). How did you feel? What motivated you?
Reflect on the people in your life (family, partner, close friends). List 3-5 recent conversations where you talked about work. What did you say? What didn't you say? Who knows you're thinking about freelancing?
Write about your relationship with stability vs. uncertainty. Describe a past situation where something felt uncertain or unstable (job change, move, relationship). How did you handle it? What did you learn about yourself?
Write about the last time you were excited to go to work. What specific project or interaction made that day different? When did you last feel that way?
List the last 5 jobs or roles you seriously considered (even if you didn't apply). For each, note: What attracted you? What made you hesitate? What pattern do you see?
Think about the worst job you've had. What specifically made it bad - the work itself, the people, the environment, the expectations? Which of those factors would be dealbreakers now?
Reflect on moments in the past 6 months when you felt genuinely proud of your work. What were you doing? Who noticed? What does this tell you about what you need in your next role?
Document 3 times in your career when you were learning fast and felt challenged in a good way. What conditions made that possible? What was different about those environments?
Write about your job search history. How did you find your last 2-3 jobs? What worked? What was frustrating? What would you do differently this time?
Think about Sunday evenings. When you imagine starting a new job, what specific worry or anxiety comes up? Where does that fear come from - past experience or assumption?
List the feedback or compliments you've received in the past year. What themes emerge? What do others see in you that you might undervalue?
Reflect on the last time you turned down a job offer or opportunity. What made you say no? Was it the right call? What does that reveal about your priorities?
Write about 3 people in your network whose careers you admire. What specifically do you admire - their role, company, work-life balance, impact? What's different about their paths versus yours?
Write about 3 specific moments in the past year when someone came to you for advice or looked to you for direction. What was happening? What did they need from you? What felt natural vs. uncomfortable?
Think about a time you had to deliver critical feedback to a peer. What did you do well? What would you do differently now? What does this reveal about your leadership instincts?
Document the last 5 times you stayed late or worked weekends in your current role. For each: Was it because of your workload or helping others? What pattern emerges about how you spend your energy?
List 3 leaders you've worked with who you respected. For each, write one specific behavior or decision that earned your respect. What do these examples tell you about the leader you want to be?
Reflect on a project where you were responsible for outcomes but not in charge. How did you influence without authority? What worked? What frustrated you?
Think about your current role: What will you genuinely miss doing yourself? What tasks are you secretly relieved to delegate? Be honest about what gives you energy.
Write about a time you saw a leader fail or lose their team's trust. What specifically went wrong? What did you learn about what NOT to do?
Document your typical week: How many hours do you spend in heads-down work vs. meetings vs. helping others? How will this need to change in a leadership role?
Think about conflict: Describe your gut reaction when two people come to you with opposing views. Do you avoid, jump to fix, or lean in? When has this served you well or poorly?
Reflect on your relationship with being liked. Write about a time you chose being respected over being liked. How did it feel? What was the outcome?
Write about the exact moment you first noticed something was wrong. What were you doing? What physical sensation or thought made you stop and think "this isn't normal"?
Document 5 specific times in the past 3 months when you felt completely drained. For each: What day/time was it? What had you just finished? How long did it take to recover?
Think back to a time (6+ months ago) when you felt energized by your work. Describe a specific day. What did you do? How did you feel at the end of it? What's different now?
List every symptom you're experiencing right now - physical, emotional, cognitive. For each, note when it started and how often it happens. What patterns emerge?
Reflect on your Sunday nights over the past month. What specific thoughts or physical sensations come up? When did this pattern start - was there a triggering event?
Write about 3 times in the past year when you said "yes" to work but everything in you wanted to say "no". What stopped you from declining? What happened afterward?
Document how your relationships have changed in the past 6 months. Who have you seen less? What invitations have you declined? What do these patterns tell you?
Think about the activities that used to bring you joy outside of work. When was the last time you did each one? What's been getting in the way?
Describe your energy levels throughout a typical week. Which days/times are worst? Which are slightly better? What happens during the better moments?
Write about a recent time you snapped at someone or felt disproportionately irritated by something small. What was really bothering you underneath?
Expert Readings
The Psychology of Salary Negotiation: Why Most Advice Fails
Conventional wisdom says "know your worth" and "be confident." That's incomplete. Here are the 4 cognitive biases sabotaging your negotiation—and how to fix them.
After the Ask: Your 30-60-90 Day Action Plan
The conversation isn't the end—it's the beginning. Here's what to do after you ask, whether they said yes, no, or maybe, to maximize your outcome.
Handling the Top 5 Manager Objections (And What They Really Mean)
"We don't have budget" doesn't mean no. "That's a big jump" isn't a rejection. Here's the decoder ring for what managers actually mean—and how to respond.
The 5-Minute Conversation Worth $15,000: What to Say
Most people fumble the actual ask with "I think I deserve..." or "I was hoping..." Here's the exact 5-minute script that turns preparation into results.
Timing Your Ask: The Performance-Budget-Relationship Matrix
Asking at the wrong time kills 40% of raise requests that should succeed. Here's the decision matrix that tells you exactly when to ask—and when to wait.
Building Your Case: The Evidence Portfolio Framework
Walking in with "I work hard" gets you nowhere. Here's the 4-category evidence system that turns vague contributions into a $12K raise.
The Career Change Timeline: Your Month-by-Month Roadmap
Most people ask: "How long does a career change take?" The answer: 9-18 months from decision to new job. Here's what happens in each phase—and how to compress the timeline without cutting corners.
The 90-Day Reality Check: Signs You're on the Right Track (or Not)
You've been in your new role for 3 months. How do you know if this career change is actually working? Here are the specific signals that separate successful transitions from expensive mistakes.
Getting Past the Resume Screen When You're a Career Changer
Your resume gets rejected in 6 seconds. Not because you're unqualified—because you formatted it like you're staying in your old field. Here's the resume structure that actually gets career changers interviews.
The Career Switcher's Narrative: What to Say (and What Not to Say)
Most career changers apologize for their background. The ones who get hired tell a story that makes their transition seem inevitable. Here's the exact narrative framework that works.
The Minimum Viable Skillset: What You Actually Need to Learn
Most career changers try to learn everything before applying. That takes 2 years and you still won't be ready. Here's how to identify the 2-4 skills that actually get you hired—and skip the rest.
The Real Cost of Career Change: A 24-Month Financial Model
Most people budget for a pay cut. They forget about the $8,000 in hidden costs, the 18-month timeline to get back to their old salary, and the opportunity cost that doubles the real price tag.
The Professional Exit: How to Resign Without Burning Bridges
Your resignation affects your reputation for years. Here's the exact process for leaving gracefully—from timing to transition to staying connected.
Evaluating Offers: The Total Compensation Calculator Recruiters Use
Comparing $160K at a startup vs $140K at Google isn't simple. Here's how to calculate the true value of base, equity, benefits, and growth.
The Negotiation Call: What to Say When They Ask Your Expected Salary
The first person to say a number loses. Here's the exact script for handling salary questions at every stage—from screening to final offer.
Salary Research That Actually Works: The $30K Mistake Most People Make
Walking into negotiations without data costs you an average of $30K. Here's how to research your true market value using the same sources recruiters use.
The Interview Prep Formula: 3 Hours That Beat 3 Weeks of Practice
Most people over-prepare for interviews in the wrong ways. Here's the high-efficiency prep method that works for technical, behavioral, and case interviews.
The Target List Method: How to Identify Your Next 20 Companies
Applying randomly to 100 companies gets worse results than strategically targeting 20. Here's how to build a target list that actually leads to offers.
Protecting Your Mental Health During Unemployment
Job loss triggers the same grief response as death or divorce. Here's the psychological framework and daily structure that prevents the spiral.
Using a Layoff as a Career Pivot Point
Most people waste this opportunity trying to get their old job back. Here's how to turn forced unemployment into strategic career repositioning.
Job Search Intensity: Sprint vs Marathon Strategy
Applying to 50 jobs/day burns you out and tanks your response rate. Here's the intensity framework that gets 5x better results.
LinkedIn After Layoff: The Open-to-Work Signal Debate
Half of recruiters say the green banner helps, half say it hurts. Here's the data on what actually works and the two-profile strategy experts use.
The Layoff Networking Paradox: Why Hiding Makes It Worse
The people who tell everyone immediately get jobs 2x faster than those who hide it. Here's the psychology of layoff networking and what to actually say.
Financial Runway Calculator: How Long You Actually Have
Most people overestimate their runway by 40-60% because they forget about taxes, healthcare, and "invisible" expenses. Here's the real math.
Available Guides
Asking for a Raise
Build your case and negotiate compensation confidently
Career Change
Transition to a new career field with confidence
Going Freelance
Build a sustainable freelance career
Job Search Strategy
Land your next role with effective search tactics
New Leadership Role
Step into management with confidence
Recovering from Burnout
Heal from burnout and prevent relapse
Recovering from Layoff
Navigate unemployment and bounce back stronger
Remote Work Success
Thrive while working from home
Starting a Business
Launch your business from idea to first customers
Workplace Conflict
Resolve conflicts professionally and protect your peace
Complete Career & Work Planning Resources
Comprehensive collection of 32 expert readings and 476 planning questions across 10 guides for career & work.
All Career & Work Planning Questions
Write about the last 3 workplace conflicts you've experienced in the past 2 years. For each one: What triggered it? How did it escalate? How did it resolve (or not)? What patterns do you notice across these situations?
Write about the moment you found out about the layoff. Where were you? Who told you? What was your first physical reaction - did your chest tighten, did you feel numb, did anger flash through you?
Think about your first week working remotely. What surprised you most? What did you expect to love but didn't? What unexpected challenge showed up?
Write about 3 specific moments in the past year when you felt energized at work. What were you doing? Who were you with? What made those moments different from your typical day?
Write about 3 specific moments in the past year when someone came to you for advice or looked to you for direction. What was happening? What did they need from you? What felt natural vs. uncomfortable?
Write about the last 3 times in the past year when you felt most energized and "in flow" at work. What were you doing? Who were you working with? What made those moments feel different from your regular workday?
Write about the exact moment you first noticed something was wrong. What were you doing? What physical sensation or thought made you stop and think "this isn't normal"?
Write about the last time you were excited to go to work. What specific project or interaction made that day different? When did you last feel that way?
Write about 3 specific moments in the past year when you thought "I could do this better as my own business." What were you doing? What frustrated you about how it was being done?
Document the last 5 times someone asked you for help or advice in your area of expertise. What specifically did they need? What does this pattern reveal about what people struggle with?
Recall 3 specific days in the past month when remote work felt great. What made those days different? What time did you start? What did you accomplish? How did you feel at the end?
Describe the physical sensations you feel when this conflict comes up. Where in your body do you feel it? When does it hit hardest - before work, during specific meetings, after certain interactions? How has this changed over time?
Document what you've lost beyond the paycheck. List specific things: the coffee routine with a colleague, the pride of introducing yourself with that company name, the rhythm of your morning commute. Which loss surprises you most?
Reflect on a typical Monday morning over the past 3 months. Write down the specific thoughts or feelings you have about starting your work week. When did this pattern start? What does it tell you about your current work situation?
Document 5 specific times in the past 3 months when you felt completely drained. For each: What day/time was it? What had you just finished? How long did it take to recover?
List the last 5 jobs or roles you seriously considered (even if you didn't apply). For each, note: What attracted you? What made you hesitate? What pattern do you see?
Think about a time you had to deliver critical feedback to a peer. What did you do well? What would you do differently now? What does this reveal about your leadership instincts?
Document the last time you dreaded going to work. What specific task, person, or situation triggered it? When did this pattern start?
Think back to a time (6+ months ago) when you felt energized by your work. Describe a specific day. What did you do? How did you feel at the end of it? What's different now?
Write about a time when working from home made you feel isolated or disconnected. What triggered it? What did you do? What would have helped in that moment?
Think about the worst job you've had. What specifically made it bad - the work itself, the people, the environment, the expectations? Which of those factors would be dealbreakers now?
Document the last 5 times you stayed late or worked weekends in your current role. For each: Was it because of your workload or helping others? What pattern emerges about how you spend your energy?
Reflect on the last 3-6 months at that job. What warning signs did you see or ignore? What signs did you NOT see? What does this tell you about what to watch for next time?
Reflect on the last 5 times you said "I wish I could..." about work. Write down each statement and when you said it. What pattern emerges?
Document 3-5 moments in your career when you had complete control over HOW you did your work (not just what you did). What did you choose to do differently? How did that autonomy feel?
Think about conflicts from your childhood or family. How did the adults around you handle disagreements? What did you learn about conflict - spoken and unspoken? How do you see those patterns showing up in your current workplace situation?
Reflect on a time in the past 3 years when you were so absorbed in a project that hours felt like minutes. What were you building or solving? What made it different from "regular work"?
List every symptom you're experiencing right now - physical, emotional, cognitive. For each, note when it started and how often it happens. What patterns emerge?
Document the moment you realized this was a serious conflict, not just a bad day. What specific incident made you think "this is a problem"? What had you been telling yourself before that moment? What changed?
Think about your identity statement. How have you been introducing yourself at parties or family gatherings? Write down what you've been saying, then write what you'll say now. What feels different or scary about that shift?
List every side project, hobby, or "just for fun" thing you've worked on in the past 2 years. Which one did you keep coming back to even when you were busy? Why?
Document your natural energy patterns working from home. When do you feel most focused? When does your energy crash? What's different from when you worked in an office?
List 3 leaders you've worked with who you respected. For each, write one specific behavior or decision that earned your respect. What do these examples tell you about the leader you want to be?
Reflect on moments in the past 6 months when you felt genuinely proud of your work. What were you doing? Who noticed? What does this tell you about what you need in your next role?
Think about the last time you worked with a difficult colleague, manager, or client. Write down what made it difficult. Now reflect: would this situation exist if you could choose who you work with?
Think about your Sunday nights over the past 3 months. What specific feeling comes up about Monday? Rate each Sunday 1-10 for dread vs excitement.
Reflect on a project where you were responsible for outcomes but not in charge. How did you influence without authority? What worked? What frustrated you?
Reflect on your Sunday nights over the past month. What specific thoughts or physical sensations come up? When did this pattern start - was there a triggering event?
Document 3 times in your career when you were learning fast and felt challenged in a good way. What conditions made that possible? What was different about those environments?
Write about your relationship with money over the past 5 years. When have you felt most financially secure? Most anxious? What would need to be true for you to feel okay with irregular income?
Reflect on how you currently end your workday. What's your transition ritual (or lack of one)? When did this pattern start? How do you feel about it?
List 5 projects or tasks from your career where you lost track of time. For each: What year? What were you creating? Why did time disappear?
Reflect on your "conflict style" in past situations. Do you tend to avoid, accommodate, compete, or collaborate? When do you switch between styles? What situations trigger your default pattern? Which style feels most authentic to who you are?
List 5 times in your career when something felt uncertain or scary, and how it turned out. What pattern do you notice about your resilience? What did you learn about yourself that you're forgetting right now?
List the last 5 times you've talked about money or negotiated price in any context (work salary, freelance rate, splitting bills, buying something). Which felt comfortable? Which felt awkward? What pattern do you notice about your relationship with pricing your own value?
Write about your job search history. How did you find your last 2-3 jobs? What worked? What was frustrating? What would you do differently this time?
Document 3 times you've started something new (job, project, relationship). How did you handle the uncertainty? What patterns do you notice in how you react to risk?
Think about your current role: What will you genuinely miss doing yourself? What tasks are you secretly relieved to delegate? Be honest about what gives you energy.
Write about 3 times in the past year when you said "yes" to work but everything in you wanted to say "no". What stopped you from declining? What happened afterward?
Write about what "winning" this conflict would look like to you. Not the professional answer, but what you actually want. What would feel like justice? What would let you sleep peacefully? Be brutally honest.
Reflect on your past 6 months of work. Write about 2-3 projects where YOU made the key decisions vs. projects where you executed someone else's decisions. Which type of work energized you more? What does that tell you?
Write about what you were tolerating at that job. The annoying parts, the energy drains, the Sunday night dread. Now that you have distance, what are you secretly relieved to leave behind?
Write about a time you felt proud of your work in the past 2 years. What specifically made you proud? Who did you tell first? Why that person?
Think about someone you know who seems to thrive working remotely. What specifically do they do differently? What boundaries have you noticed? What habits stand out?
Write about your relationship with "being visible" at work remotely. Do you over-communicate to be seen? Feel forgotten? Feel relieved by less scrutiny? When did this pattern emerge?
Document a time in the past year when you had an idea for how to do something better but couldn't implement it due to company constraints. What was the idea? What stopped you? What would you have done differently if you'd had full control?
Document your work identity crisis. Complete this sentence 10 different ways: "Without my job title, I am..." What comes up? Which completions feel true versus scary?
Document what you complained about at work in the past month. Write down 5-10 specific complaints. Which ones are about the job vs the field itself?
Document how your relationships have changed in the past 6 months. Who have you seen less? What invitations have you declined? What do these patterns tell you?
List 5 moments in the past month when this conflict affected you outside of work. What were you doing? What thought or feeling interrupted you? Who in your personal life has noticed a change in you?
Think about the worst professional failure you've experienced. How long did it take you to recover? What does this tell you about your resilience for business setbacks?
Write about a time you saw a leader fail or lose their team's trust. What specifically went wrong? What did you learn about what NOT to do?
Think about Sunday evenings. When you imagine starting a new job, what specific worry or anxiety comes up? Where does that fear come from - past experience or assumption?
Reflect on the story you're telling yourself about why this happened. Write it as a narrative. Now write it from your best friend's perspective. What changes? What bias are you applying to yourself?
Think about your values that feel violated by this conflict. What matters to you that's being compromised - respect, fairness, autonomy, competence, belonging? When did you first develop these values? Why do they matter so much to you?
List the feedback or compliments you've received in the past year. What themes emerge? What do others see in you that you might undervalue?
Reflect on your current weekly schedule. Which 10 hours would you realistically cut to work on your business? What would you have to say no to?
Think about your childhood or early career. Write about a time when you created something or started something from scratch (could be a lemonade stand, school project, side hustle, anything). How did you feel? What motivated you?
Recall the moments in the past week when you felt most distracted at home. What were you doing? What pulled your attention? What pattern do you notice?
Document your typical week: How many hours do you spend in heads-down work vs. meetings vs. helping others? How will this need to change in a leadership role?
Think about the activities that used to bring you joy outside of work. When was the last time you did each one? What's been getting in the way?
Reflect on conversations where you said "I'm thinking about a career change." Who did you tell? What did saying it out loud feel like?
Reflect on your current workspace. How did it evolve to what it is now? What compromises did you make? What bothers you about it but you haven't fixed?
Think about your professional confidence before and after the layoff. On a scale of 1-10, where were you before? Where are you now? Write about 3 accomplishments that should anchor you at your old number - why aren't they?
Describe your energy levels throughout a typical week. Which days/times are worst? Which are slightly better? What happens during the better moments?
Reflect on the people in your life (family, partner, close friends). List 3-5 recent conversations where you talked about work. What did you say? What didn't you say? Who knows you're thinking about freelancing?
Think about conflict: Describe your gut reaction when two people come to you with opposing views. Do you avoid, jump to fix, or lean in? When has this served you well or poorly?
Think back to when you first chose your current career path. What did you believe about it then? What would you tell that version of yourself now?
Reflect on the last time you turned down a job offer or opportunity. What made you say no? Was it the right call? What does that reveal about your priorities?
Write about why you want to start a business NOW versus a year ago or a year from now. What changed? What's the real urgency?
Describe the version of yourself you've become during this conflict. Are you more withdrawn? More reactive? More political? More careful? How is this different from who you normally are? Who notices this change?
Reflect on your relationship with being liked. Write about a time you chose being respected over being liked. How did it feel? What was the outcome?
List the people whose opinions you're worried about (parents, former colleagues, friends in successful careers). For each person, write what you imagine they're thinking. Now write what they're probably actually thinking. Notice the difference?
Write about a recent time you snapped at someone or felt disproportionately irritated by something small. What was really bothering you underneath?
Write about 3 people whose careers you envy. For each: What specifically do you envy? Their day-to-day, status, income, or something else?
Write about your relationship with stability vs. uncertainty. Describe a past situation where something felt uncertain or unstable (job change, move, relationship). How did you handle it? What did you learn about yourself?
Write about 3 people in your network whose careers you admire. What specifically do you admire - their role, company, work-life balance, impact? What's different about their paths versus yours?
Think about Sunday evenings before a remote work week vs. when you worked in-office. What's different in how you feel? What does this tell you about your remote work experience?
Document every time in the past 6 months you complained about your current work situation. What specific patterns emerge? Are you running FROM something or TO something?
Write about what you're afraid will happen if this conflict doesn't resolve. Not just professional consequences, but the person you're afraid you'll become. What would it mean about you, your judgment, your career, your ability to handle hard things?
Map the stakeholder landscape. Create a list with: Primary conflict person, their allies, your allies, neutral parties, decision-makers. For each person: What's their stake? What do they know? What do they believe about the situation?
Write about what you were optimizing for in your last job versus what you want to optimize for next. Was it prestige, money, learning, stability, title? What does this transition give you permission to change?
List the professional achievements you're most proud of. For each, note: Did you do it alone or through others? What does this tell you about your transition to leadership?
Think about your energy patterns at work. What tasks drain you? What tasks energize you? When do you find yourself procrastinating versus diving in? What does this tell you about fit?
Document the last time you worked on a personal project or side hustle outside your main job. What was it? Why did you start it? What happened to it? What does this tell you about your entrepreneurial energy?
List 5 people you know who run their own businesses. For each: What do you envy about their situation? What looks harder than you expected? What surprises you?
Reflect on your work boundaries from 1 year ago versus now. What boundaries have eroded? When did you start checking email at night, working weekends, or skipping lunch?
List your non-negotiable values about work (max 5). For each, rate your current job 1-10 on delivering it. Which gaps hurt most?
Track your actual work hours for the next 3 days. When did you start? When did you truly stop? How many times did you check work after "done"? What pattern emerges?
Document your relationship with work. Think about the past 5 years - when did work feel meaningful versus when did it feel like just a paycheck? What pattern emerges about what you actually need from a job?
Reflect on your energy patterns over a typical week. When are you most creative? Most drained? How does this match with when you'd need to work on your business?
List 5 core values that matter to you (like creativity, family time, growth, autonomy, helping others). For each, write how your current work situation aligns or conflicts with it.
Think about someone you know who is freelancing or running their own business. Write down: what do you admire about their situation? What concerns you about it? Be specific.
Document the timeline of escalation. List every significant incident from first tension to now. For each: Date, what happened, who witnessed it, what was said/done, how each person responded. What does this timeline reveal?
Write about your best manager and your worst manager. For each, describe one specific moment that defined the relationship. What patterns do you want to repeat or avoid?
Audit your current workspace setup. List every item: desk, chair, monitor, lighting, noise level. Rate each 1-10 for functionality. What's causing the most physical discomfort?
Document the moments when you've felt underutilized or bored at work. What was missing? What were you capable of that wasn't being used? How did you handle it?
Document the advice you've gotten about this career change. Who said what? Which advice resonated? Which advice made you defensive?
Research the organizational context affecting this conflict. What pressures is your team under? What changes are happening? What's the performance review cycle? What are the company politics? How might these factors be fueling the conflict?
Reflect on your past year's biggest work achievement - something you're genuinely proud of. Write down: what percentage of the credit was yours vs. your team/company? If you'd done this as a freelancer, what would have been different?
Reflect on your identity outside work. When you introduce yourself at a party, what do you say after your name? How would a career change affect that?
Review your calendar from the past 2 weeks. Count: video calls, phone calls, async work blocks, meeting-free days. What percentage of your time is synchronous vs. asynchronous?
Reflect on your last performance review or feedback. Strip away the layoff context - what was genuinely valuable feedback? What skills were you actually building well? What does that tell you about your next move?
Think about the last time you felt proud of something you accomplished. How long ago was it? What made it meaningful? Why don't you have more moments like that?
Reflect on your commute and work environment preferences. Think about specific days when location/setup affected your productivity or mood. What patterns emerge about what you actually need?
Write about a time you had to sell yourself or your ideas (job interview, persuading your team, asking for a raise). What felt natural? What felt forced? What does this reveal about how you'll sell your business?
Think about your identity: Complete this sentence 5 different ways: "I'm someone who..." How many of these are about what YOU do vs. what you enable others to do?
Write about a time when you stayed in a job longer than you should have. What kept you there? What finally made you leave? What would you tell yourself now about recognizing those signs earlier?
Document your self-talk over the past week. What critical things have you said to yourself about your performance, worth, or capability? Where did these messages originate?
Document your support system. Who in your life will celebrate wins with you? Who will help you process failures? Who might actively discourage you? How will you handle each?
Document a time you had to make a decision with incomplete information. What process did you use? Who did you consult? What would you do the same or differently as a leader?
Write about what "success" looks like to you in 3 years. Not what you think you should want - what do you actually picture? Where are you working? Who are you working with? What does a Tuesday afternoon look like?
Write about a past major life change (move, relationship, school). How did you handle uncertainty then? What coping strategies worked?
Gather data on the other person's perspective. What do they care about professionally? What pressures are they under? What past experiences might shape their behavior? What might they be afraid of? Where might they have a valid point?
Document all the places you've worked from home in the past month. For each location: how long, how productive (1-10), what made it work or not work?
Think about a time you helped someone else through a layoff or career crisis. What advice did you give them? What compassion did you show? Now write those same words to yourself - why is it harder to believe?
Think about the last major decision you made (moving, job change, ending relationship). How long did you deliberate? What finally pushed you to act? What does this tell you about your decision-making under uncertainty?
Track your actual working hours for the past 2 weeks. For each day: start time, end time, breaks taken, evening/weekend work. Calculate your true average weekly hours.
Analyze the communication history. List every conversation about this conflict: Who initiated? What was said? What was avoided? What tone was used? What patterns emerge? What hasn't been said that needs to be?
Think about retirement age you. What does that version of yourself wish you had done in this career moment?
List every interruption or distraction you experienced yesterday. For each: what was it, how long did it take to refocus, could it have been prevented?
Research your financial runway. List every expense for the next 3 months in detail. Categorize each as: critical (rent, food), important (insurance, phone), or cuttable (subscriptions, dining out). What's your actual survival number?
Research each person on your new team: For each member, document their role, tenure, and one thing they've accomplished. What gaps in knowledge do you notice?
Research 10 people who do work similar to what you want to freelance in. For each, document: their title/niche, where you found them (LinkedIn, personal site, platform), how they describe their services, and one thing that stands out about their positioning.
Research 5 job postings that genuinely interest you. For each, note: What excites you? What concerns you? What skills do they emphasize that you have/lack? What salary range appears?
Map your key stakeholders: List everyone whose support you need (peers, leadership, cross-functional). For each, note: What do they care about? What do they need from your team?
Investigate 5 freelance marketplaces or platforms in your field (Upwork, Toptal, Fiverr, Contra, industry-specific platforms). For each, note: typical project rates, client reviews, how competitive it looks, whether your skillset fits. Which 2-3 feel most aligned with your work?
Investigate similar conflicts in your organization. Ask trusted colleagues: How are conflicts typically handled here? What happens to people who escalate? Who has successfully navigated this? What's the unwritten code? What does HR actually do vs what they say?
Identify 3 companies you'd want to work for. For each, research: Recent news, growth trajectory, Glassdoor reviews (focus on cons), employee tenure patterns. What red or green flags emerge?
Research and list 10 people or businesses currently solving the problem you want to solve. For each: What are they doing well? What gaps or complaints do you see in reviews/feedback?
List every recurring meeting on your calendar. For each, note: Is it necessary? Could you delegate attendance? What would happen if you skipped it?
Research your team's communication patterns. Count messages/emails you received yesterday by: urgent, important-not-urgent, could-wait, unnecessary. What's the ratio?
Document your severance package line by line. How much total? When does it arrive? What happens to health insurance and when? What's the COBRA cost? Create a calendar of every financial deadline in the next 90 days.
Research 5 people on LinkedIn who made a similar career transition. For each: What was their bridge (certification, side project, hybrid role)? How long did it take?
Document all your current work responsibilities and projects. For each, identify: Who assigned it? Is it in your job description? What's the actual business impact?
Research the financials of freelancing in your area. Calculate: your current monthly take-home pay, your monthly essential expenses, your current benefits value (health insurance, retirement match, PTO), and estimate what the freelance equivalent would cost you. What's the gap?
Find 3 people on LinkedIn who have your target role. Study their backgrounds: How did they get there? What's their career path pattern? What credentials or experiences do they share?
Investigate your team's recent history: What projects succeeded or failed in the past 6 months? Who was involved? What does this tell you about team dynamics and capabilities?
Inventory your remote work tools and subscriptions. Which do you use daily? Weekly? Never? Which feel essential vs. which add complexity?
Find and interview 3 people who match your target customer profile. Ask them: What's the hardest part of [the problem]? What have they tried? What would make them switch to something new?
Research unemployment benefits in your state. What's the weekly amount? How long does it last? When should you file? What are the specific filing deadlines? Create a checklist of every document you need to apply.
Document the impact on your work performance. Track for one week: Time spent thinking about this conflict, tasks delayed, meetings you dreaded, quality of work affected, opportunities you avoided. What is this costing you professionally?
Find 3 job postings in your target field. For each, list required skills. Highlight which ones you have, which you could learn in 3 months, which need 6+ months.
Research your leverage and constraints. List: Your formal power, your social capital, who respects you, what you're delivering, what you could walk away from, what you can't afford to lose. What's your real position in this negotiation?
Track your movement throughout one workday. How many times did you leave your desk? For how long? How does this compare to office days?
Document your current work situation's hard facts. List: your salary, benefits, PTO days, work-from-home policy, typical hours, commute time, how much control you have over projects, upcoming promotions or raises. What's the total package worth?
Document the last 10 purchasing decisions you made in your business area. What made you choose one option over another? What would have made you pay more? What almost stopped you from buying?
Research salary data for your target role in your location using 3 different sources (Glassdoor, Levels.fyi, Payscale, etc.). Document the range and what factors (experience, company size, industry) affect it most.
Research your company's policies on: PTO/sick leave, mental health days, flexible hours, remote work, leaves of absence. What options exist that you haven't explored?
Create a network map. Draw three circles: inner (would help you today), middle (might help if you asked), outer (valuable but don't know well). Put names in each circle. Count them. Which circle is surprisingly empty? Which is surprisingly full?
Document the context of your transition: Are you replacing someone (why did they leave)? Promoted from within? New to the company? How does this context shape expectations?
Research salary ranges for entry vs experienced roles in your target field (Glassdoor, Levels.fyi). Compare to your current salary. What's the realistic pay cut or timeline to match?
Collect evidence and documentation. What exists: Emails, messages, meeting notes, performance reviews, project outcomes? What's missing? What should you start documenting? What patterns does the evidence show that you might be missing emotionally?
Find 5 people currently working in your target role. Research their LinkedIn: Where did they start? What certifications do they list? What do their first 5 years look like?
Investigate the job boards and platforms where your target roles are actually posted. Check 10 recent postings: Where do they appear? Are they on niche sites, LinkedIn, company sites? Where should you focus?
Document your "career visibility" in the past month. List: presentations given, ideas shared publicly, 1-on-1s with leadership, projects you led. How visible are you actually?
Research your top 5 competitors. For each, document: their pricing, their main customer promise, what their customers complain about most, and what would need to be true for their customers to switch to you.
Identify 3-5 people at your company who seem to have healthy work-life balance. What do you observe about their habits, boundaries, or approach to work?
Research your organization's leadership culture: How do successful leaders operate here? What behaviors are rewarded? What causes leaders to struggle or fail?
Research 3 competitors or established freelancers in your exact niche. For each, document: their pricing (if public), their client testimonials, their portfolio/case studies, their years of experience. How do you compare? What's your competitive advantage?
Research your industry's hiring market right now. Find 5 recent articles or reports about hiring trends in your field. What are they saying - expanding, contracting, stable? How does this change your 3-month strategy versus 6-month strategy?
Research 3 online communities for your target field (Reddits, Slack groups, Discord). Read the past week of posts. What are people actually complaining about?
Design your ideal remote work routine from wake-up to shutdown. Hour by hour: what would you do differently? What would you keep? Where are you being unrealistic?
Find 3 online communities where your target customers hang out. Spend 2 hours reading. What do they complain about? What questions come up repeatedly? What language do they use to describe their problems?
Map the informal power structure: Beyond org charts, who has influence? Who do people go to for advice? Who are the connectors and the gatekeepers?
List every recruiter you've ever talked to, every recruiting email you've received in the past year. Find their contact info. Note which ones specialized in your field. Create a spreadsheet: name, company, last contact date, specialty, priority level.
Analyze your manager's communication patterns. When do they send emails/messages? What are their expectations about response times? Are these explicit or assumed?
Design your ideal resolution scenario. Not what you think is possible, but what would actually satisfy you. What changes? What stays the same? What does your day-to-day look like? What does your relationship with this person look like? What needs to be acknowledged?
Investigate the legal and business setup for your location. Research: do you need an LLC or can you start as sole proprietor? What's required to register? What are the tax implications? What licenses or certifications are needed? List specific resources you found.
Research 3 recruiting agencies or headhunters in your industry. Note: What roles do they typically place? What's their reputation? How do they prefer to be contacted? Are they worth engaging?
Look at your company reviews on Glassdoor, Blind, or similar sites. What do people say about work-life balance, burnout, or turnover? Do their experiences match yours?
Research your potential market size. Calculate or estimate: how many businesses or individuals might need your service in your target geography, what they typically pay, how often they need this service, and what percentage you'd need to capture to hit your income goals.
Find "day in the life" content from 3 people in your target role (YouTube, blogs, TikTok). List specific tasks they do daily. Which excite you? Which concern you?
Research the startup costs for your business idea. List every single expense you can think of for the first 6 months: one-time costs, monthly recurring, and unexpected buffers. What's the realistic total?
Investigate current team pain points: Review recent surveys, retros, or feedback. What keeps coming up? What are people frustrated about? What's not being said publicly?
Find 3 recent layoff announcements or hiring freezes in your target industry. What companies are affected? What roles are safe vs. risky? How does this change your targeting strategy?
Identify your non-negotiables and your flexible zones. What absolutely must change for you to stay? What can you live with? What would be nice but isn't essential? What are you willing to compromise on? Where will you absolutely draw the line?
Research salary data for your role in your market. Check 3 different sources (Glassdoor, levels.fyi, Blind, etc). What's the range? Where were you in that range? What should you target for your next role given your experience level?
Plan your workspace upgrade within your current constraints (budget, space, living situation). What 3 changes would have the biggest impact? What's your timeline?
Document every skill you've used in the past year. Go through your calendar month by month - what did you actually do? What tools did you use? Create a master list, then mark each as: expert, proficient, or learning. What surprises you?
Interview someone who started a similar business in the past 3 years. Ask: What surprised them most about the first 6 months? What would they do differently? What did they underestimate?
Research your skip-level manager: What are their priorities for the next quarter? What challenges are they facing? How does your team fit into their strategy?
Document your network's freelance potential. Go through your LinkedIn connections, past colleagues, and professional contacts. List 10-15 people who: (1) might hire you, (2) know people who might hire you, or (3) are freelancing and could give you advice. Note your last interaction with each.
Map out the strategic options available to you. Consider: Direct conversation, mediated conversation, involving your manager, involving their manager, HR involvement, team restructuring, your transfer, their transfer, quiet quitting the relationship, leaving the company. What's the full menu?
Investigate the typical interview process for your target role. Search Glassdoor, Reddit, or YouTube for specific companies. What stages? What types of questions? Technical assessments? How long does it typically take?
Create your communication strategy with your team. For each type of update: which channel, how often, what level of detail? What boundaries will you set?
Research educational paths for your target field. List 3 options (bootcamp, degree, self-taught, certification). For each: cost, time commitment, job placement rate.
Map out who depends on you for what at work. For each dependency: Is it sustainable? Could someone else do it? What would break if you took a 2-week vacation tomorrow?
Map out your "focus architecture" for deep work. When will you schedule it? How will you protect it? What will you say when interrupted? Be specific.
Document your team's current commitments: What projects are in flight? What deadlines are coming? What dependencies exist? Where are the risks?
Evaluate the risks and benefits of each strategic option. For your top 3 approaches: Best case outcome, worst case outcome, most likely outcome, time required, emotional energy required, career risk, relationship risk. What can you actually afford?
Document your skills inventory. List 10 skills needed to run your business. For each: rate yourself 1-10, note who you know with that skill, and estimate cost to outsource if needed.
Research your industry's freelance timing and seasonality. Look for patterns: when do companies typically hire freelancers? Are there busy seasons or slow periods? When do budgets refresh? What does this mean for your launch timing?
Research companies in your target list. Find 10 companies hiring for roles like yours. For each: why are they hiring (growth or backfill)? What's their funding status? What's their glassdoor rating? What's their layoff history? Create a scoring system.
Look up 10 companies that hire for your target role. For each: company size, industry, location flexibility. Which 3 feel like the best culture fit?
Research alternative titles for the role you want. Search LinkedIn for "people who do X are called Y at different companies." List 5-7 title variations you should be searching for.
Research burnout recovery timelines and professional resources. What therapists, coaches, or support groups specialize in burnout? What does your insurance cover?
Calculate your financial runway. How long could you survive on savings? What if you went to part-time? What's your absolute minimum monthly budget?
Research failure stories: Find 3 people who tried this transition and struggled or went back. What went wrong? What would they do differently?
Investigate tools and systems you'll need. Research and list: invoicing software, project management tools, time tracking, contracts/proposals, accounting, website/portfolio platform. For your top 3 choices in each category, note the cost and learning curve.
Find 5 professionals in your target role who are active on LinkedIn or Twitter. What do they post about? What skills/tools/trends do they discuss? What does this tell you about the role?
List every professional community you're part of: Slack groups, LinkedIn groups, industry associations, alumni networks. When did you last engage with each? Which ones have active job boards? Create a re-engagement plan for each.
Gather data on team capacity: Who's overloaded? Who has bandwidth? Who's at flight risk? What does their workload distribution reveal?
Develop your visibility strategy for the next quarter. What will you make sure leadership sees? How will you share wins? What opportunities will you create to be seen?
Research 5 businesses that failed in your space in the past 5 years. What were they trying to do? Why did they shut down? What can you learn from their post-mortems or final updates?
Plan for the "what if nothing changes" scenario. If this conflict continues exactly as is for 6 more months, what's your strategy? What boundaries would you need? What support would you need? What would make this sustainable vs unsustainable?
Think through the timing and sequencing of your approach. What needs to happen first? What depends on what? What conversations set up other conversations? What's urgent vs important? What's the right pace - immediate action or strategic patience?
Find and analyze pricing for 10 comparable products/services. Create a range: lowest price, average, highest. Where would you fit? What would justify your pricing to customers?
Find job postings at entry, mid, and senior levels in your target field. Create a comparison chart: What skills/experience separate each level?
Research your references. List 5 people who could speak to your work. For each: what projects did you do together? What specific results could they cite? When did you last talk? Write a draft message to reach out to each one.
Plan your work-life boundary system. What will signal "work mode" vs. "home mode"? What time boundaries feel right? How will you enforce them with yourself and others?
Research industry best practices for first 90 days: Read 3 articles or talk to 3 leaders who've made similar transitions. What advice resonates? What doesn't apply to your situation?
Research the key skills and tools mentioned across 10 job postings for your target role. Create a frequency count: Which appear most often? Which do you have? Which are learnable? Which are dealbreakers?
Identify other roles within your company that might be less demanding. What internal transfers are possible? Who could you talk to about them?
Research insurance and risk management. Calculate costs for: health insurance (if leaving employer coverage), liability insurance, disability insurance, equipment insurance. What's the total monthly cost? What happens if you can't work for 3 months?
Document your achievements with metrics. Go through your last 2 years - every project, every win. For each, add a number: revenue impacted, time saved, people managed, growth percentage. Which achievements have the strongest numbers? Which need better framing?
Investigate your target companies' employee value propositions. Check their careers pages, LinkedIn posts, and Glassdoor. What do they emphasize? What matters to you? Where's the alignment or mismatch?
Investigate your predecessor's approach: If replacing someone, what did they do well? What did the team wish was different? What can you learn from their tenure?
Design your communication strategy. For the key conversation you need to have: What's your opening? What's your core message? What examples will you use? What do you want them to understand? What outcome are you requesting? How will you handle their defensive response?
Document your skills gap. List the top 10 services or deliverables in your field. For each, honestly rate yourself 1-10. Which 3 skills would make you most hireable if you improved them? What would it take to improve?
Design your remote relationship-building approach. Who do you need to connect with more? How often? What format works for you (coffee chats, co-working, async check-ins)?
Gather data on your industry's work culture. Are other companies in your field known for better work-life balance? What would a job search timeline realistically look like?
Research the legal and regulatory requirements for your business type. List: business structure options, licenses needed, insurance required, and tax implications. What surprises you?
Research the hiring process for your target field. How many interview rounds? What assignments? Live coding? Portfolio review? What's different from your current field?
Document all the tools and platforms you'll need (website hosting, payment processing, email, etc.). For each: research 3 options, compare costs, note which your competitors use.
Design your listening tour: Plan 1-on-1s with each team member. For each conversation, what 3-5 questions will you ask? What do you want to learn vs. what do you want to share?
Design your ideal recovery week. What would you do each day? How much rest versus gentle activity? What would make you feel most restored?
Create your 90-day plan in three 30-day sprints. Sprint 1: what must happen? Sprint 2: what should happen? Sprint 3: what would success look like? Be specific with activities, not vague goals. What's the forcing function for each sprint?
Research your current employer's policies. Find out: non-compete clauses in your contract, intellectual property agreements, policies about moonlighting or side work, notice period requirements. What constraints do these create?
Create your meeting optimization strategy. Which meetings could be async? Where do you need to speak up more? Which should you decline? What's your plan?
Look up industry trends for your target field. Find 3 articles from the past 6 months. Is this field growing, stable, or contracting? What skills are becoming essential?
Create your target company list by tier: Tier 1 (dream companies, lower odds), Tier 2 (solid fit, realistic), Tier 3 (safe bets, might not be perfect). Aim for 3-5 in each tier. What's your application strategy for each tier?
Identify who you need in your corner. Who could be a sounding board? Who could mediate? Who could advocate for you? Who has influence with the other person? Who could provide air cover? Who shouldn't know about this? Why each person?
Plan your first team meeting: What tone do you want to set? What will you share about yourself? What questions will you ask? What will you explicitly NOT promise?
Find 5 YouTube videos, podcasts, or blog posts from people teaching others how to solve the problem you want to solve. What gets the most engagement? What questions appear in comments? What's missing?
Plan your daily structure. Without work, what's your new routine? Map out: wake time, exercise, job search hours, skill-building time, networking time, mental health time. What time blocks are non-negotiable? What keeps you from spiraling?
Research cost of living in cities where your target jobs are concentrated. If remote isn't an option, what would relocation cost? Which cities are realistic?
Calculate your freelance financial runway. Based on your research, write down: your monthly essential expenses as a freelancer (including insurance), how many months of savings you currently have, how much you'd need before you feel comfortable leaving your job. What's your target date to hit that number?
Map out your competitive advantages for your target role. What do you have that most candidates don't? What's your unique angle? How will you lead with this in applications and interviews?
Create a 3-tier priority system for your current work. Critical (business breaks), Important (can wait a week), Can drop (low impact). What can you eliminate or delegate?
Plan for the scenarios where remote work gets hard. Loneliness? Burnout? Distraction? For each: what's your early warning sign and your specific response?
Plan for emotional regulation during difficult conversations. What are your triggers in this conflict? What physical signals tell you you're getting activated? What's your plan to pause? What grounding techniques work for you? Who can you debrief with after?
Consider the second-order consequences of each approach. If you escalate to HR, what ripples? If you have a direct confrontation, who hears about it? If you transfer, what story gets told? How might each choice affect your reputation, your network, your future at this company?
Find 3 recruiters or staffing agencies specializing in your target field. Research their LinkedIn posts: What skills are they desperate for? What advice do they give?
Design your service offering. Write out 3-5 specific services you'll offer. For each, describe: exactly what's included, how long it takes, who it's for, and what transformation or outcome the client gets. Make them concrete enough that you could list them on a website today.
Design your job search strategy. Will you go broad (apply to 100 jobs) or narrow (target 10 companies deeply)? What's your reasoning? What does your industry, timeline, and network suggest? Create decision criteria for which approach fits you.
Research and document your market size. How many people have this problem? How many are currently paying for solutions? What percentage would you need to capture to hit your revenue goals?
Identify your quick wins: What 2-3 things could you improve in the first 30 days that would build credibility? Choose things that matter to the team, not just to leadership.
Develop your professional development plan while remote. What skills do you want to build? How will you learn without office osmosis? What's your 6-month goal?
Plan your job search timeline based on your current situation. If employed: How many hours per week realistically? If unemployed: What's your financial runway? What milestones should you hit weekly?
Plan specific boundaries you need to set. For each: What's the boundary? Who needs to know? How will you communicate it? What will you do when it's tested?
Design your tracking system for applications. What information do you need to capture (company, role, date, contact, status, follow-up dates)? How will you stay organized without it becoming overwhelming?
Plan your narrative for interviews. How will you explain the layoff in one sentence? Write 5 different versions. Which feels honest but not defensive? Which reframes it as an opportunity? Practice with someone and note which version they respond to best.
Develop your "Plan B" professional strategy. If this doesn't resolve, what are you building toward? What skills? What relationships? What external opportunities? How do you protect your career momentum regardless of how this conflict plays out?
Create your pricing strategy. For your main service offerings, write down: your ideal rate, your "getting started" rate, your "I'm desperate" minimum, and your "dream client" rate. For each rate, explain your reasoning. What rate will you lead with?
Create your minimum viable offering. What's the simplest version of your product/service that would solve the core problem? What features are you tempted to add but could launch without?
Create a skills transfer map: List 10 skills from your current role. For each, write 2-3 ways it applies to your target field with specific examples.
Design your communication cadence: How often will you meet 1-on-1 with each person? Team meetings? Skip-levels? What channels will you use for what types of updates?
Map out a sustainable weekly schedule. What are your non-negotiable work hours? When will you fully disconnect? What personal activities must be protected?
Design your "remote work reset" routine for when things feel off. What will you assess? What experiments will you try? How will you know what's working?
Plan how you'll build relationships with peers: Which peer leaders do you need to connect with first? What do you need from them? What can you offer them?
Write out the specific conversation you need to have this week. Script your opening 2-3 sentences. What do you say? Where and when will you have it? How will you request the conversation? What's your backup plan if they decline or deflect?
Plan your financial runway. Calculate: monthly living expenses, monthly business costs, and total savings. How many months can you survive with zero revenue? What's your drop-dead date?
Create your networking strategy. Calculate: if you need 1 offer, you need roughly 5 final rounds, 15 phone screens, 50 applications, or 20 referrals. Work backward - how many coffee chats per week does that require? Is that realistic with your network?
Calculate your financial runway. Write down: current savings, monthly expenses, expected income drop, months of buffer. What's your absolute deadline to earn again?
Optimize one aspect of your workspace today. Whether it's lighting, chair height, or monitor position - make one physical change right now. What did you improve?
Plan your transition timeline. Map out the next 12 months in quarters. For each quarter, write: what you'll accomplish while still employed, when you'll start taking clients, when you'll go full-time, and what financial or client milestones need to happen first.
Develop your strategy for the resume gap or career change explanation. What's the honest but strategic story? Practice writing it in 2-3 sentences. How does it position you as stronger, not defensive?
Develop a conversation plan with your manager. What do you need to say? What specific changes do you need? What's your backup plan if they're unsupportive?
Create your learning plan: What leadership skills do you need to develop? How will you learn (books, mentors, courses, practice)? What timeline is realistic?
Plan your networking approach based on your personality and current network. Are you starting cold or leveraging existing connections? What's realistic for you - coffee chats, LinkedIn messages, events? What's your weekly goal?
Plan for the emotional rollercoaster. What will you do when you get a rejection? When you don't hear back? When someone gets a job before you? List 5 specific coping strategies with names and actions, not vague "self-care."
Define your ideal first 10 customers. Be specific: What industry are they in? What's their budget? What problem keeps them up at night? Where do they currently look for solutions?
Map out 3 possible transition paths: immediate jump, gradual shift (part-time learning), or hybrid role bridge. For each, write the 12-month timeline with milestones.
Design your ideal client profile. Describe in detail: company size, industry, decision-maker title, budget range, project type, and values/culture. Now write about 3 specific companies or people who fit this profile. How will you reach them?
Block your first "deep work" session for this week. Put it in your calendar with a specific focus. What day? What time? What will you work on? Do it now.
Create your documentation system starting today. What will you track? Where will you keep it? How often will you update it? What format works for potential HR involvement? What's your first entry? Set a reminder for when you'll review it.
Design your transition strategy if you need to leave this job. What's the timeline? What preparation is needed? What's your exit criteria?
Plan your delegation strategy: List the work you currently do. For each item, decide: Keep doing, delegate immediately, delegate after training someone, or stop doing entirely.
Map out your first 90 days week by week. What needs to happen in weeks 1-4, 5-8, 9-12? What are the critical milestones that indicate you're on track versus need to pivot?
Map out your client acquisition strategy. For your first 5 clients, write down: where you'll find them (personal network, platform, outreach, etc.), what you'll say to them, why they'd hire you over someone else, and when you'll start this outreach.
Create your interview preparation system. What stories do you need ready? (Achievement, failure, conflict, leadership) How will you practice? Who can do mock interviews? What's your timeline?
Design your skills gap plan. Based on job descriptions you want, what skills appear in 80% of them that you don't have? Pick the top 3. For each: free resource, time needed, proof of learning. Can you build these while job searching?
Create your end-of-day shutdown ritual starting today. Choose 3 specific actions that signal work is done. What are they? When will you start this routine?
Identify your support system and schedule check-ins. Who's your emotional support person? Who's your strategic advisor? When will you talk to them? What do you need from each? How often? Reach out to them this week.
Identify your biggest skill gap from your research. Create a learning plan: What will you learn? What resources? How many hours per week? What's the proof you've learned it?
Create a daily recovery routine. What will you do each morning and evening to support healing? What environmental changes would help (workspace, bedroom, morning routine)?
Plan how to rebuild your energy reserves. What activities recharge you? How can you incorporate them weekly? What obstacles need to be removed?
Plan your positioning and differentiation. Complete these sentences: "I help [specific type of client] achieve [specific outcome] through [your unique approach]." Write 3 different versions. Which feels most authentic? Which would make someone say "that's exactly what I need"?
Plan your story for interviews. Write 3 versions: 2-minute, 30-second, and 10-second explanation of why you're changing careers. Practice until natural.
Map out the skills or credentials you're missing for your target role. Which are must-haves you can acquire quickly (online course, certification)? Which can you learn on the job? Which are negotiable with the right story?
Create your portfolio or work samples strategy. What can you show (not tell) about your abilities? What projects can you share? What needs to be rebuilt or cleaned up? Make a priority list - what would take 1 day versus 1 week to prepare?
Reach out to one person on your team for a non-work connection this week. Who will you contact? What will you suggest? Schedule it now or send the message.
Design your testing strategy. How will you validate your idea with $500 or less? What specific result would prove people actually want this? What result would tell you to stop?
Establish one boundary you'll enforce this week. What specific behavior will you not tolerate? What will you say when it happens? What will you do if they push back? Practice the exact words. When's the first moment you'll test this?
Design your decision-making framework: What decisions will you make yourself vs. delegate? How will you involve the team? What's your process for tough calls?
Plan your LinkedIn strategy. Will you announce the layoff publicly or stay quiet? What's the risk/benefit of each? If you announce, draft the post now. What tone - vulnerable, optimistic, matter-of-fact? What response are you hoping for versus dreading?
Strategize how to handle urgent requests and "emergencies". What's your criteria for true urgency? How will you push back on false urgency?
Take one concrete action to shift the dynamic within 3 days. Could be: Requesting a direct conversation, sending a clear email, involving a mediator, changing how you show up in meetings, adjusting your response pattern. What's the smallest move that changes the game? When exactly will you do it?
Set up one automation or tool that will improve your remote work this week. Calendar time blocking? Slack status automation? Focus mode? Implement it now.
Develop your strategy for currently employed job searching. How will you handle time off for interviews? What's your story if you need to leave during work hours? When will you tell your current employer?
Map your 30-60-90 day priorities: Month 1 - What? Month 2 - What? Month 3 - What? How will you know you're on track?
Design your de-risking strategy. List 3 ways to test this career before fully committing (freelance project, volunteer, part-time, shadowing). Which can you do this month?
Plan your pricing strategy. List 3 different pricing models you could use. For each: estimate monthly revenue with 10, 50, 100 customers. Which model makes you feel most confident? Most nervous? Why?
Create your boundary framework. Define your rules for: working hours, response time to clients, weekend/evening availability, project scope changes, difficult clients, and when you'll say no. What are your non-negotiables?
Plan how you'll handle former peers: If promoted from within, what boundaries need to change? What relationships need to evolve? How will you address this directly?
Design your business model evolution. Write about: how you'll start (hourly? project-based? retainer?), what you'll transition to in year 2, and what your ideal business looks like in year 3. What would let you work less but earn more?
Create a portfolio plan if needed for your target field. List 3-5 projects you need to showcase. For each: What does it demonstrate? How long to build? Where will you host it?
Design a support system for your recovery. Who can you confide in? Who will hold you accountable to boundaries? What professional help do you need?
Decline or delegate one meeting on your calendar this week. Which one doesn't need you? How will you communicate the change? Do it today.
Prepare for the difficult conversation. Role-play with someone: You be them, they be you. What do they say that triggers you? Practice staying calm. What's your response to their likely defensiveness? Record yourself saying your main points. What do you notice?
Design your decision criteria for job offers. Before you're in the heat of needing a job, list what you'll evaluate: salary floor, company stage, role scope, manager quality, learning opportunities, stability. Rank these. What's non-negotiable versus nice-to-have?
Plan how you'll evaluate offers when they come. What are your non-negotiables (salary floor, benefits, location, culture)? What are nice-to-haves? How will you compare multiple offers objectively?
Create your unique positioning. Complete this sentence 10 different ways: "Unlike [competitor], we [unique approach] so that [customer benefit]." Which version feels most true and most compelling?
Plan how you'll handle your current job during launch. Will you quit? Go part-time? Work nights/weekends? What conversations need to happen? What's the transition timeline?
Create your outreach message template strategy. What's your approach for cold outreach vs. warm introductions? What value can you offer? How will you personalize at scale? Draft your core framework.
Plan the conversation with your partner/family. Write down: their likely concerns, your responses, what you need from them, what timeline works for everyone.
Schedule your first "remote work review" session one week from today. Put it in your calendar. What will you assess? What questions will you ask yourself?
Plan your backup scenarios. If you don't find a job in 1 month, what changes? 3 months? 6 months? For each milestone, write: financial changes needed, strategy pivots required, geographic flexibility, role flexibility. What's your decision trigger for each?
Plan your safety net and worst-case scenario. Write down: if you get no clients for 3 months, what will you do? If you hate freelancing after 6 months, what's your backup plan? What would make you go back to employment? Have you researched how long it takes to get hired in your field?
Plan how to manage perfectionism or overwork tendencies. What are your triggers? What new thought patterns would help? What will you do when you catch yourself overworking?
Create your self-care plan for the conflict period. What will you do daily to discharge stress? What's your line for when you need a mental health day? Who notices when you're not okay? What activities are non-negotiable for your wellbeing? Schedule them now.
Design your feedback approach: How will you give regular feedback? How will you solicit feedback on your leadership? What systems will you put in place?
Create a relapse prevention plan. What early warning signs will you watch for? What will you do if symptoms return? Who will help you notice?
Map out your learning and skill development plan. Based on your skills gap research, identify: the top 3 skills you'll develop, how you'll develop them (courses, practice projects, mentorship), and when you'll work on this while transitioning.
Design your daily/weekly job search routine. What will you do each day? How will you balance applying vs. networking vs. skill-building? What prevents burnout while maintaining momentum?
Create your personal brand strategy. What's the one thing you want to be known for in your next role? How does your LinkedIn, resume, interview answers, and network conversations reinforce that? Where's the mismatch between your brand and your behavior?
Create your support system: Who will you turn to for advice? Who can you vent to safely? Who will give you honest feedback? How will you maintain these relationships?
Design your customer acquisition strategy. List 5 specific channels where you'll find customers. For each: estimate time investment, cost, and realistic number of customers in first 3 months.
Map your network for the target field. List people you know (or know someone who knows): Which 5 could give advice? Which 3 could refer you? How will you reconnect?
Implement one boundary this week: no work after X time, no Slack on phone, lunch away from desk. Which boundary will you try? How will you enforce it?
Decide on your escalation criteria and timeline. What specific things, if they happen, mean you escalate? What's your deadline for attempting direct resolution before involving others? What are the tripwires that mean you go to HR immediately? Write them down.
Create one artifact that increases your visibility this week: a project update, a contribution to team docs, or sharing a win. What will you create? When will you share it?
Design your worst-case scenario plan. If this career change fails in 12 months, what's your backup? Write the specific steps to return to stability.
Map out your career path beyond this burnout. What do you want your work life to look like in 1 year? 3 years? What needs to change to make that possible?
Plan your approach to the "Why are you leaving?" question. What's the honest reason? What's the strategic framing? How do you talk about it without badmouthing your current/former employer?
Take steps to protect your professional standing. What project should you make visible? Who should you build relationships with? What wins should you communicate to your manager? What opportunities should you pursue? Do one of these this week.
Plan your work-life boundaries: What hours will you work? When will you disconnect? What will you protect? How will you model healthy boundaries for your team?
Map your decision triggers. What specific metrics or events would tell you to: keep going, change direction, or shut down? Be specific with numbers and timeframes.
Plan your relationship management strategy. How will you tell your partner/family about job search stress? What do you need from them - space, accountability, encouragement, financial partnership? Have that conversation before you're in crisis. What specific support will you ask for?
Create your marketing and visibility strategy. Plan how you'll be findable: will you have a website? What will you post on LinkedIn? Will you write content? Speak at events? Join communities? List 5-7 specific, repeated actions you'll take to stay visible.
Plan your learning roadmap. List 5 critical skills/knowledge gaps. For each: find one specific resource (course, book, mentor) and schedule when you'll learn it before launch.
Test one routine change for 3 days starting tomorrow. Different start time? Morning walk? Dedicated lunch break? What will you experiment with? Track how it feels.
Set a review date to assess if your approach is working. Pick a date 2-4 weeks from now. What metrics will tell you if things are improving? What signs mean it's time to change strategy? What questions will you ask yourself? Put it in your calendar with these specific reflection questions.
Create a learning schedule for the next 3 months. Block out specific hours per week. What will you learn? How will you protect this time from other commitments?
Design your onboarding and delivery process. Write out step-by-step: how someone goes from "interested" to "signed client" to "completed project." What happens at each stage? What documents do you need? What's your communication cadence?
Design your team vision: What do you want this team to be known for in 6 months? What culture do you want to build? How will you communicate this vision?
Plan how to reconnect with your purpose or meaning in work. What drew you to this field originally? What aspects of your work still feel meaningful? How can you do more of that?
Design your tracking system. Create a spreadsheet: company, role, date applied, contact person, status, next step, notes. Add columns for: referral source, salary range, decision deadline. What metrics will you track weekly? What's your follow-up system?
Map your LinkedIn optimization strategy. What needs updating - headline, summary, experience, skills? Who do you need endorsements from? What content could you post to build visibility? What's your action plan?
Plan your current job exit strategy. Write down: ideal last day, transition plan for your work, what to tell colleagues, how to leave on great terms, what not to burn.
Plan your learning strategy. You have unexpected time - will you take a course, build a project, get a certification, or dive deep into a new tool? What would make you more valuable in 30 days? What would you regret not doing with this window of time?
Plan your relationship with your current employer. Decide: will you tell them you're building a freelance business? When? Will you ask to transition to part-time? Will you offer to freelance for them? What's your notice period strategy?
Strategize time off and recovery. When can you take extended time off? How will you prepare your team? What will ensure you actually rest during that time?
Plan how you'll handle inevitable mistakes: When you mess up (you will), how will you acknowledge it? Who will you tell? How will you course-correct?
Develop your follow-up strategy for applications and interviews. When do you follow up? What do you say? How persistent is too persistent? What system ensures you don't forget or over-do it?
Create your "good enough" standards. For website, branding, initial product - what's the minimum quality you need to launch versus what you're tempted to perfect? Where are you likely to over-invest time?
Design your risk mitigation plan. List your 5 biggest fears about starting this business. For each: what's the actual worst case? How would you recover? What can you do now to reduce the risk?
Create your sustainability plan. Write down: how many clients per month is sustainable? How many hours per week will you work? How will you handle time off? What will you do to avoid burnout? When will you start saying no to projects?
Schedule a complete health check-up this week. Book appointments for: primary care doctor, therapist/counselor, and any specialists needed. Set calendar reminders now.
Create your metrics for success: Beyond company metrics, how will YOU measure if you're succeeding as a leader? What leading indicators will you track?
Update your resume today. Open it right now. Read it as a stranger. What story does it tell? Rewrite your last role to focus on impact, not responsibilities. Use metrics. Save both versions. Which one would you want to interview?
Outline your first 90 days in a new role. What do you need to learn? Who do you need to impress? What quick wins could you create? How will you avoid imposter syndrome?
Write your professional summary/elevator pitch right now. Time yourself - it should be 30 seconds. Record it or say it out loud. What feels awkward? What's missing? Revise until it feels natural.
Schedule your first conversations: Book 1-on-1s with each team member this week. Send a brief note beforehand about what you want to discuss. When will these happen?
Plan how to handle income changes. If taking a pay cut: What expenses can you reduce? What lifestyle changes are temporary vs permanent? Where's your pain point?
Plan your support and accountability. Who will you share your goals with? How often will you update them? Who can you ask for specific types of help (technical, emotional, business advice)?
Send 3 networking messages this week. Identify specific people (former colleagues, alumni, industry contacts) and draft personalized messages. What specific ask or value can you offer each person?
Block out protected time on your calendar for the next 2 weeks. Mark specific hours as "unavailable" for recovery activities. What will you do during those blocks?
Send 3 messages this week to people in your inner circle. Not "I got laid off, know any jobs?" but "I'm exploring my next move, would love your perspective on the market." Write those 3 messages now. Who are you sending them to? When will you send them?
Create your portfolio or work samples. This week, gather 3-5 examples of your best work. For each, write: the project context, your role, the outcome, and client testimonial (even if internal). Format this in a way you could share with a potential client today.
Apply to 5 jobs this week as practice. Not dream jobs - practice jobs. Get comfortable with the application process, the rejection, the waiting. Track: which applications took the longest? Which questions stumped you? What do you need to prepare better?
Update your resume for your top target role today. Remove irrelevant experience, emphasize relevant skills, quantify achievements. Have one other person review it. What feedback surprises you?
Map your competitive advantage. Based on your research, what can you do better/different than existing solutions? What strengths do you have that competitors don't? Be brutally honest about what you're assuming versus what you know.
Set up your first meeting with your manager: Prepare 3 specific questions about their expectations for you. What support do you need? When will you meet?
Draft an email to your manager requesting a conversation about workload. Write what you'll say. When will you send it? What meeting time will you propose?
Design your personal brand for the transition. Write your new LinkedIn headline, update your bio, list 3 types of content you could share to build credibility in the new field.
Draft your service descriptions for your website or pitch. Write the exact copy you'd use to describe your top 3 services. Include: what it is, who it's for, what's included, the outcome, and the starting price or range. Read it out loud - does it sound like you?
Set up job alerts right now. Go to LinkedIn, Indeed, and one industry-specific board. Create alerts for 3 different search terms related to your target role. What terms did you choose? When will you check these alerts? Schedule it in your calendar.
Set up your basic business infrastructure this week. Choose and create accounts for: invoicing software, email for business, project management tool, and contract template. Even if you don't launch for months, having these ready removes friction.
Apply to 5 jobs this week that genuinely interest you (not just easy applications). For each, customize your resume and write a real cover letter. Track: company, role, date, what made you excited.
Implement one boundary TODAY. Turn off work notifications after 6pm, stop checking email on weekends, or decline one unnecessary meeting. Document how it feels.
Create your personal operating manual: Write a 1-page doc about how you work (communication preferences, meeting style, pet peeves, strengths). Share it with your team. When will you do this?
Create your revenue milestones. What monthly revenue would cover: just business costs, business + your minimum living expenses, business + comfortable salary? What customer numbers do you need for each milestone?
Map out certification or credential timing if needed. When will you start? When will you finish? How does this align with your job search timeline?
Write your outreach message template. Draft the email or message you'll send to your first 10 potential clients. Include: brief intro, what you do, why you're reaching out to them specifically, and a clear call-to-action. Test it with one person this week.
Prepare answers to the 5 most common interview questions for your field. Write them out, then practice saying them out loud. Time yourself. Which answers ramble? Which feel authentic? Refine.
Identify one thing you need to stop doing immediately: What task or behavior from your old role will you consciously stop this week? How will you redirect people who expect you to keep doing it?
Plan your experiment timeline. What's one small project you can complete in 30 days to test if you actually like this new field? Define what success looks like.
Reach out to one recruiter today. Find one who specializes in your field. Send a brief message: your background, what you're looking for, your timeline. Don't overthink it. Just send. Write that message now - what will you say in 3 sentences?
Write and send a message to 5 potential customers today. Describe the problem you want to solve and ask: Is this actually a problem for you? What have you tried? Would you pay for a better solution?
Reach out to 3 trusted people today. Tell them you're dealing with burnout and ask for support. Who will you contact? What specifically will you ask for?
Reach out to 2 people who have your target role for informational interviews. Draft your outreach message. What questions will you ask? What value can you offer them in return?
Clean up your online presence this week. Google yourself. Check LinkedIn, Twitter, GitHub, personal website. What's outdated? What's embarrassing? What's missing? Make a list of 5 things to update, then do 3 of them today.
Schedule 3 informational interviews with people in your target field this month. Write down who, when, and 5 questions you'll ask each person.
Take one complete day off this week with zero work. Mark it on your calendar. Set up auto-responder. Plan exactly what restorative activities you'll do instead.
Create a simple landing page this week. One headline describing what you do, three bullets on benefits, and a way for people to express interest. Share the link with 20 people and document their reactions.
Create your rate card and pricing document. Make a simple one-page doc with: your services, your rates (or starting rates), what's included, payment terms, and any package deals. This is for YOU to reference when someone asks "how much do you charge?"
Reach out to 2 mentors or peers who've made similar transitions: Schedule 30-minute calls to ask about their experience. Who will you contact? What will you ask?
Schedule and complete 3 customer discovery calls this week. Prepare 5 questions. After each call, document: What surprised you? What invalidated your assumptions? What got them excited?
Update your LinkedIn profile today. Change your headline to reflect your transition, add a summary about your pivot, update your "Open to Work" settings.
Delegate or drop 3 tasks from your plate by end of week. For each, decide: Who can do it? How will you hand it off? Or can you just stop doing it?
Schedule 3 informational interviews this month. Not job interviews - conversations. People in roles you want, companies you admire, or career paths you're curious about. Write the list of 10 people to ask, then reach out to 3 today. What will your message say?
Set up job alerts on 3 platforms where your target roles are posted. Configure them to be useful, not overwhelming. What search terms? How often? Where will you track new postings?
Document your first observations: After your first week, write down 3 things you noticed about the team, culture, or challenges. Don't judge yet, just observe. When will you do this?
Schedule 3 coffee chats or video calls this month with people who are already freelancing. Prepare specific questions: how they got their first client, how they price, what surprised them, what they wish they'd known, and if they'd do it again.
Set up a forcing function for reflection: Block 30 minutes every Friday for the next 8 weeks to review what you learned and adjust your approach. Put it on your calendar now.
Set up your "freelance launch" savings account today. Open a separate account if needed, and set up automatic transfers. Calculate: how much you need total, how much you'll save per month, and what date you'll hit your target. Make the first transfer now.
Identify one skill gap you can start addressing this week. Enroll in a course, watch tutorials, or practice a tool. What can you add to your resume in 2 weeks that addresses a common requirement?
Start one portfolio project or case study this week. Define the scope (must finish in 2-4 weeks), set up the repo or document, block 5 hours this week to begin.
Build or outline your absolute minimum product this week. If you had to deliver something to a customer in 2 weeks, what would it be? Create it or spec it out in detail.
Create one piece of visible work this week. Write a LinkedIn post about your expertise, publish a GitHub project, share a case study, record a quick tutorial. Something that shows your skills, not just tells. What will you create? When will you ship it?
Start a daily check-in practice. Each evening for the next week, spend 5 minutes noting: energy level (1-10), what drained you, what helped. Review patterns on day 7.
Join 2 new professional communities this week. Find a Slack group, Discord server, or LinkedIn community in your field. Introduce yourself. Comment on 3 posts. Ask one question. Where will you join? What will your intro say?
Clean up your online presence today. Google yourself. Check your LinkedIn, Twitter, GitHub, personal site. What would a recruiter find? What needs updating or removing? Make 3 specific changes.
Reach out to 3 people who run businesses you admire. Ask for 20 minutes of their time. Prepare specific questions about their launch experience. Document their advice.
Remove work access from your phone for one weekend. Delete Slack, email apps, or move them to a folder you can't see. Notice what changes about your anxiety and rest.
Join 2 online communities in your target field today. Introduce yourself in each, follow 10 active members, commit to reading daily for 2 weeks.
Communicate one clear priority to your team this week: What is the most important thing for them to know right now? How will you tell them? When?
Write your resignation or transition conversation plan. Draft exactly what you'll say to your manager when the time comes. Practice it out loud. What's your ideal notice period? What projects will you transition? When will you have this conversation?
Send 5 connection requests on LinkedIn to people in your target role. Personalize each message: mention specific work of theirs, ask one question, keep under 200 characters.
Prepare your interview stories. Write down 5 STAR stories (Situation, Task, Action, Result) from your recent work. Practice telling each in 2 minutes. Record yourself. What sounds awkward? What impact number is missing? Revise and practice again.
Identify your first delegation: Choose one task you're currently doing that someone else could own. Who will you delegate to? How will you set them up for success? When will you start?
Open a separate bank account for your business this week. Deposit your initial investment. This makes it real - document how it feels to take this concrete step.
Schedule 3 activities this month that used to bring you joy. Put them on the calendar with the same priority as work meetings. Treat them as unmovable appointments.
Prepare 5 thoughtful questions to ask in interviews. These should reveal company culture, role expectations, team dynamics, growth opportunities. Write them down. Which ones genuinely help you evaluate fit?
Create your client contract template. Research standard freelance contracts in your industry, and draft your version covering: scope, payment terms, timeline, revisions, cancellation, intellectual property. Consider having a lawyer review it. Get this done before you need it.
Create a physical separation between work and life. Set up a dedicated workspace if you work from home, or establish a "commute" ritual to transition home. Implement this week.
Enroll in one learning resource this week (course, bootcamp, certification). Pay for it if possible - financial commitment increases follow-through. Start the first module.
Reach out to your former colleagues this week. Not all of them - pick 3 people you genuinely liked working with. Send a real message, not a template. Ask how they're doing. Mention a specific memory. Then mention you're looking. What will you say to each person?
Build your initial outreach list. Create a spreadsheet with 25-50 potential clients or referral sources. For each, note: name, company, why they're a good fit, how you'll reach them, and any existing connection. Rank them by priority.
Schedule coffee with 3 peer leaders in the next 2 weeks: Focus on building relationships, not transactional asks. Who will you reach out to? What do you want to learn about them?
Create your first pitch. Write 3 versions: one sentence, one paragraph, one page. Practice the one-sentence version on 10 people. Document: Who immediately got it? Who looked confused? What questions came up?
Schedule 2 coffee chats or video calls this week with people in your network. Set specific calendar time. Prepare what you'll ask. What help or insight do you need from each person?
Create a decision log: Start documenting key decisions you make, why you made them, and what you learned. Review monthly. Set up the system this week.
Practice saying "no" to one request this week. Script exactly what you'll say. Role-play it if needed. Then do it and document how it went.
Create your interview story bank today. Write down 3 specific examples: a major achievement, a failure you learned from, a conflict you resolved. Use the STAR format. Practice saying them out loud.
Have the conversation with your partner/family this week. Schedule it, choose a calm time, prepare your points, ask for their input on the timeline.
Set up your basic business infrastructure this week: register your business name, create email address, buy domain, set up simple website. Document what you learn and what takes longer than expected.
Do something today that isn't job searching. What gives you energy or identity outside of work? Exercise, create something, help someone, learn something unrelated. Schedule it for 1 hour today. What will it be? When exactly will you do it?
Set up your tracking and accountability system. Create a simple doc or spreadsheet to track: client conversations, proposals sent, revenue, expenses, and hours worked. Decide what metrics matter to you. Set a weekly time to review these numbers.
Take one small paid project this month. Even if it's tiny - $100, 5 hours, for a friend. The goal is to practice the full cycle: proposal, contract, work, invoice, getting paid. Document what went smoothly and what felt awkward.
Audit your current job responsibilities. Which ones build transferable skills? Double down on those. Which are dead-end for your new path? Start delegating or minimizing.
Audit your references right now. List 3 people who would give you a strong reference. When did you last talk to them? Reach out to reconnect before you need the reference. What would you want them to emphasize?
Ask for feedback explicitly: In your first 1-on-1s, ask each person: "What should I know that I haven't asked about?" Take notes without defending. What will you do with what you hear?
Join 3 communities where your target customers spend time. Introduce yourself. Spend 30 minutes daily for a week just listening and helping. Document what you learn about their needs.
Start exploring exit options if needed. This week: update your resume, reach out to one recruiter or colleague about opportunities, or research companies with better cultures.
Set up accountability. Find one person who will check in on your job search weekly. Tell them your weekly goals. Give them permission to ask hard questions. Who will it be? When is your first check-in? What metrics will you share?
Create your first offer and try to make one sale this month. Even if it's not perfect, even if you're nervous. Document: What objections did you hear? What made people hesitate? What would you change?
Take one concrete step toward your backup plan. Even if your main plan is working, do one thing this week that builds optionality: start a side project, reach out to someone in an adjacent field, research a certification, update your portfolio. What's your one step?
Create your new professional email/portfolio site this week. Buy a domain if needed. Set up a simple one-page site with: who you are, what you're transitioning to, how to reach you.
Establish a weekly review practice. Every Sunday, assess: What worked for recovery this week? What didn't? What one thing will you adjust next week? Do your first review this Sunday.
Write your "why I'm going freelance" story. Draft a 3-paragraph LinkedIn post or email explaining your decision. Not polished PR - authentic reasoning. What are you moving toward? Practice saying this out loud until it feels natural.
Establish one personal boundary this week: What will you protect (dinner time, no weekend emails, morning workout)? Communicate it clearly. Hold yourself accountable.
Take one action today that scares you in your job search. Apply to a reach company, message someone senior, admit a skill gap in your application. What's holding you back from this action? Do it anyway.
Schedule your monthly check-in for the next 6 months. Put recurring calendar blocks (30 min each) to review: financial progress, client pipeline, what's working, what's not, and next month's priorities. Commit to showing up for these, even when busy.
Block out your business-building schedule for the next 4 weeks. Put specific tasks on your calendar. What will you work on Mon/Wed/Fri 6-8am? Sat mornings? Treat these like unmovable meetings.
Apply to 2 stretch roles in your target field this month, even if you don't meet all requirements. Treat it as interview practice. Track what questions you get asked.
Attend one industry event or virtual meetup this month. Prepare 3 questions to ask speakers, introduce yourself to 3 people, follow up with LinkedIn connections within 24 hours.
Document your first week in detail. What did you actually work on versus what you planned? Where did time disappear? What tasks energized you? What drained you? What will you change next week?
Start a public learning journal (blog, Twitter/X, LinkedIn posts). Commit to sharing one thing you learned per week. Build your credibility and network through transparency.
Create accountability by going public. Post on social media or tell 10 people what you're building and what you hope to achieve in 30 days. Document your feelings before and after sharing.
Set up a simple way to track key metrics from day one: conversations with potential customers, email signups, revenue, expenses. Review weekly. What trends do you notice after the first month?
Reach out to a recruiter specializing in your target field. Send a concise email: your background, what you're transitioning to, ask what skills are most in-demand right now.
Review your first 30 days and make your continue/pivot/stop decision. Document the evidence: What validated your idea? What surprised you? What would you do differently if starting over today? What are your next 30-day goals?
Block time this week to update your resume for your target field. Lead with transferable skills, reframe past work with new industry language, get feedback from 2 people in the field.
All Career & Work Expert Readings
Protecting Your Mental Health During Unemployment
By Templata • 6 min read
## The Mental Health Crisis No One Warns You About You expect financial stress after a layoff. What you don't expect: the identity crisis, the shame spiral, the 3am panic attacks, the complete loss of routine and purpose. **The data**: - 73% of unemployed people report symptoms of depression or anxiety (vs 25% of employed) - Suicide risk increases 2-3x during unemployment - Average time to "psychological recovery" after layoff: 8-12 months (longer than job search itself) > "Losing a job is ranked as one of life's most stressful events, alongside divorce and death of a family member. Yet we treat it like a logistics problem, not a mental health crisis." - Dr. Sarah Schewitz, Clinical Psychologist Here's how to protect your mental health while you search. ## The Five Stages of Layoff Grief **Stage 1: Shock (Days 1-7)** - Numbness, disbelief, "this isn't real" - Functioning on autopilot - Common thoughts: "Did this really happen?" "What do I do now?" **What helps**: Give yourself permission to feel nothing. Don't force productivity. Handle logistics only. **Stage 2: Denial/Bargaining (Weeks 2-3)** - "I'll have a new job in 2 weeks, no problem" - Manic productivity, applying to 50+ jobs/day - Avoiding telling people **What helps**: Reality-test your timeline with someone who's been through this. Set realistic expectations. **Stage 3: Anger (Weeks 3-5)** - Rage at your company, your manager, the unfairness - Bitterness watching former coworkers still employed - "Why me? I worked so hard." **What helps**: Let yourself be angry (journal, therapy, boxing), but don't let it leak into networking or interviews. **Stage 4: Depression (Weeks 5-8)** - "I'll never find anything" "I'm unemployable" - Sleeping 12+ hours or insomnia - Avoiding job search entirely **What helps**: This is the most dangerous phase. Get professional help if needed. See warning signs section below. **Stage 5: Acceptance (Weeks 8+)** - "This happened. It's not my fault. I'll figure it out." - Stable routine, consistent effort, realistic hope - Able to talk about it without shame **What helps**: Connection with others going through it. Proof that people DO recover (LinkedIn messages from people who made it through). Not everyone goes through stages linearly. You might bounce between them. That's normal. ## The Identity Crisis Problem For most people, job = identity. "What do you do?" really means "Who are you?" When you lose your job, you lose your answer. **The toxic thought patterns**: - "I'm a [role]" → "I WAS a [role]" → "I don't know what I am" - "I provide for my family" → "I'm a burden" - "I'm successful" → "I'm a failure" **The reframe**: You are not your job. You are a person with skills, relationships, values, and a temporary employment situation. **Action**: Write down 10 identity statements that have nothing to do with work: - "I'm a parent who shows up for my kids" - "I'm a friend people call when they need support" - "I'm someone who loves [hobby]" - "I'm resilient—I've survived hard things before" Read this list daily. Especially on bad days. ## The Structure Problem (And How to Solve It) Employed you: - Alarm at 7am - Shower, breakfast, commute - 8+ hours of structured work - Social interaction built-in - Clear sense of accomplishment Unemployed you: - No reason to get up - No structure to the day - No one to talk to - "I applied to jobs" doesn't feel like accomplishment **The research**: Loss of routine is as damaging as loss of income for mental health. **The solution**: Build structure yourself. ### The Unemployment Daily Schedule **7:00-8:00am: Morning routine** (non-negotiable) - Wake up at same time every day (yes, even weekends) - Shower and get dressed (not pajamas) - Breakfast + coffee - 10-minute walk outside **Why it matters**: Your brain needs triggers that "the day is starting." Without them, you'll stay in bed until noon and hate yourself. **9:00am-12:00pm: Job search work** - Applications, networking, research - Treat it like a job (focused, structured time) **12:00-1:00pm: Lunch + break** - Eat a real meal (not snacking in front of laptop) - Step outside **1:00-3:00pm: Skill building OR exercise** - Monday/Wednesday/Friday: Exercise (gym, run, yoga) - Tuesday/Thursday: Skill building (courses, portfolio work) **Why the split**: Exercise prevents depression. Skills prevent obsolescence. You need both. **3:00-4:00pm: Connection time** - Coffee chats with network - LinkedIn engagement - Texting friends **Why it matters**: Social isolation kills. Force connection even when you don't feel like it. **4:00pm+: Done with "work"** - No more job searching after 4pm - Read, hobbies, family time, TV - You need recovery time **Why it matters**: Without boundaries, job searching bleeds into every waking hour and you burn out in 3 weeks. ## The Social Isolation Trap When you lose your job, you lose: - 8+ hours/day of human interaction - Work friends - Slack conversations - The social proof of "having somewhere to be" **The spiral**: Isolation → depression → avoid people → more isolation → worse depression **The fix**: Force social contact even when you don't want to. **Minimum viable social contact** (per week): - 2-3 coffee chats or calls (job search related is fine—connection counts) - 1 social hangout with friends/family (NOT job search related) - 1 group activity (gym class, hobby meetup, volunteering) **If you live alone**: This is critical. You could go days without talking to anyone. Set phone alarms to call someone. **If you're introverted**: Social contact still matters, just adjust volume. Even introverts need SOME human connection to stay mentally healthy. ## The Shame Problem **The thought**: "Everyone's judging me for being unemployed." **The reality**: Most people are too busy with their own problems to judge you. And the ones who do judge aren't worth your energy. **The shame triggers**: - Running into someone you know: "So what are you up to these days?" - Family gatherings: "How's work going?" - Social media: Everyone else posting their wins **The antidote**: Practice your answer. "I was affected by layoffs at [company] in [month]. I'm actively looking for [type] roles. It's been an adjustment, but I'm staying focused." **Why this works**: - Factual, not emotional - No apology (you didn't do anything wrong) - Moves conversation forward **Advanced move**: Tell people early and often. The more you say it, the less power it has. Shame thrives in secrecy. ## Warning Signs You Need Professional Help These are not "tough it out" situations. These require intervention. **Get help TODAY if you experience**: - Suicidal thoughts (Call 988 - Suicide & Crisis Lifeline) - Self-harm urges or behaviors - Inability to get out of bed for multiple days - Panic attacks multiple times per week - Substance abuse to cope (drinking alone, drugs) - Complete loss of interest in everything (anhedonia) **Get help THIS WEEK if you experience**: - Persistent thoughts of worthlessness or hopelessness - Insomnia or sleeping 12+ hours daily - Significant weight loss/gain - Avoiding all social contact - Crying multiple times per day - Inability to focus on job search at all **Where to get help**: - BetterHelp, Talkspace: $60-90/week for online therapy - Open Path Collective: $30-80/session for in-person therapy - Community mental health centers: Sliding scale based on income - Employee Assistance Program (EAP): Check if your former employer offers 3-6 months post-termination - Unemployment support groups: Free, peer support **Cost objection**: "I can't afford therapy when I'm unemployed." **Reality**: Untreated depression makes job search 3-4x longer. If therapy costs $300/month but cuts your unemployment by 1 month, you've saved $8,000+ in lost income. It pays for itself. ## The Comparison Trap (Social Media) **The problem**: You're unemployed and struggling. You open LinkedIn and see: - Former coworkers celebrating promotions - Peers announcing new jobs - Everyone looking successful and happy **Your brain**: "Everyone's fine except me. I'm the only failure." **The reality**: You're seeing highlight reels, not reality. The person posting about their new job might have been searching for 6 months and had 3 panic attacks that week. **The fix**: **Option 1**: Limit social media to 30 minutes/day, only for job search purposes. Don't scroll feeds. **Option 2**: Unfollow/mute anyone whose posts trigger comparison or shame. You can reconnect later. **Option 3**: Post your own reality. "Week 5 of job searching. Some hard days, but staying consistent." You'll be shocked how many people DM you saying "me too." ## The Financial Stress → Mental Health Loop Financial stress causes mental health problems. Mental health problems make job searching harder. Harder job search = longer unemployment = more financial stress. **Breaking the loop**: **Action 1**: Run the financial runway calculation (see our financial runway guide) - Knowing exactly how long you have reduces anxiety - "I don't know how long I can last" is scarier than "I have 5 months" **Action 2**: Build the bare-minimum budget - What's the absolute minimum you need? (cut everything possible) - Knowing your floor is reassuring **Action 3**: Explore stopgap income - Gig work (Uber, DoorDash, freelancing) - It won't replace your salary, but $1,000/week buys 2-3 extra months - Bonus: It gives you structure and small wins **Why it helps**: Control reduces anxiety. Even small actions that extend your runway help you feel less helpless. ## The Small Wins Strategy When you're unemployed, "wins" change. **Before layoff**: Shipped a feature, closed a deal, got promoted **After layoff**: Sent 3 applications, had a good conversation, got out of bed **The problem**: Your brain doesn't register these as wins, so you feel like you're accomplishing nothing. **The fix**: Track and celebrate small wins. **Daily win tracker** (use a note app or journal): - "Sent 2 customized applications" - "Had a great networking call with Sarah" - "Worked out even though I didn't want to" - "Made a healthy dinner instead of ordering in" - "Didn't spiral when I got a rejection" **Why it works**: Your brain needs evidence that you're making progress. This is the evidence. **Friday ritual**: Review your week's wins. You did more than you think. ## The Partner/Family Support Conversation If you have a partner or family, layoff affects them too. **What they're feeling** (but might not say): - Financial fear - Worry about your mental health - Frustration if you seem "not trying hard enough" - Helplessness (they can't fix it for you) **What you need from them**: - Space to process emotions without judgment - Belief that you'll figure it out - Help maintaining routine (accountability) - Normalcy (not every conversation should be about job search) **The conversation**: "This is hard for both of us. Here's what would help me: [specific requests]. What do you need from me?" **Boundaries to set**: - "Please don't ask 'how's the job search going?' every day. I'll update you weekly." - "I need you to believe I'm trying, even if you can't see all the work." - "If I seem withdrawn, it's not about you. It's the situation." ## Your Week 1 Mental Health Checklist □ Set a consistent wake-up time □ Create a daily structure (use template above or customize) □ Tell at least 3 people about your layoff (practice removing shame) □ Schedule 1 social activity this week (coffee, call, hangout) □ Identify 1 exercise/movement you'll do 3x this week □ Write down 10 identity statements unrelated to work □ Set social media limits or mute triggering accounts □ If experiencing warning signs, research therapy options You will get through this. Thousands of people have been exactly where you are and made it out. You will too.
Using a Layoff as a Career Pivot Point
By Templata • 6 min read
## The Hidden Opportunity in Forced Change Getting laid off feels like catastrophe. And financially, it is urgent. But strategically, it's something else: leverage to make a change you wouldn't have made otherwise. **The data**: 43% of people who were laid off in 2020-2023 ended up in a different industry or role type. Of those, 67% reported higher job satisfaction than their previous role. Why? Because they had "permission" to change. They were already disrupted—might as well redirect. > "A layoff breaks the golden handcuffs. You're going to be uncomfortable anyway—might as well aim for a job you actually want instead of settling for the same role at a different company." - Career coach Jenny Blake, Pivot: The Only Move That Matters Here's how to turn a layoff into a strategic pivot. ## The Pivot vs Repeat Decision Framework First question: Should you pivot at all, or just find the same role elsewhere? **Repeat the role (faster, lower risk)** if: - You genuinely enjoyed your last role (not just tolerated it) - Your industry is growing and hiring - Your skills are highly transferable and in-demand - Financial runway is short (less than 4 months) **Pivot to something new (slower, higher upside)** if: - You were miserable but stayed for money/stability - Your industry is declining (mass layoffs, AI disruption, consolidation) - You have 6+ months runway - You have a clear alternative that excites you **The hybrid**: 70% of successful pivoters don't make dramatic leaps. They make adjacent moves—same skills, different industry OR different role, same industry. ## The Four Types of Career Pivots Not all pivots are equally difficult. Choose based on your runway and risk tolerance. ### Type 1: Same Skills, Different Industry (Easiest) **Example**: Marketing manager in tech → Marketing manager in healthcare **Difficulty**: 2/5 **Timeline**: 3-5 months **Transferability**: 80% of your skills apply directly **What you need**: - Understand the new industry's business model and jargon - Connect with 5-10 people currently in that industry - Rebrand your resume to emphasize transferable results **Real case**: Dev, product manager at a failed fintech startup → product manager at a climate tech company. Same PM skills, new domain. Got offer in 4 months. ### Type 2: Same Industry, Different Role (Moderate) **Example**: Software engineer in tech → Product manager in tech **Difficulty**: 3/5 **Timeline**: 4-6 months **Transferability**: 60% skills overlap **What you need**: - Portfolio projects proving competence in new role - Informational interviews to understand day-to-day reality - Networking into "internal transfer" roles (companies more likely to hire engineer→PM from within, or from referrals) **Real case**: Sarah, SWE at Meta → laid off → completed PM course + built side project → APM at Stripe. 5 months. ### Type 3: Different Skills, Adjacent Industry (Hard) **Example**: Teacher → Corporate trainer / instructional designer **Difficulty**: 4/5 **Timeline**: 6-9 months **Transferability**: 40% skills overlap, but narrative is clear **What you need**: - Reframe your existing skills using corporate language - Certifications or courses to fill gaps (e.g., "ATD Certification for Corporate Trainers") - Strong narrative about why you're making the switch **Real case**: Marcus, high school teacher → laid off during pandemic → online courses in instructional design + freelance projects → corporate L&D role. 8 months. ### Type 4: Complete Career Change (Very Hard) **Example**: Accountant → Software developer **Difficulty**: 5/5 **Timeline**: 12-18 months **Transferability**: 20% skills overlap **What you need**: - Extensive retraining (bootcamp, self-study, degree) - Portfolio of 3-5 real projects - Network from scratch in new field - Expect entry-level role/pay initially **Real case**: Jessica, accountant → coding bootcamp → junior developer role (took 60% pay cut initially, back to previous salary in 2 years). **Warning**: Only do this if you have 12+ months runway OR can work part-time while retraining. ## The Pivot Validation Process (Do This Before Committing) Don't spend 6 months retraining for a role you'll hate. Validate first. ### Step 1: Conduct the "3-Interview Stress Test" Interview three people in your target role: 1. **The Escaped** - Someone who LEFT that role/industry (reveals downsides) 2. **The Lifer** - 10+ years in the role (reveals long-term reality) 3. **The Recent Switcher** - Pivoted 1-2 years ago (reveals what it actually takes) **Questions to ask**: - "What do you actually do all day?" (not the job description—reality) - "What surprised you most about this role?" - "What kind of person burns out vs thrives here?" - "If you were pivoting into this today, what would you do differently?" **Red flags that kill the pivot**: - All three people warn you about the same downside - The day-to-day sounds worse than your current role - Everyone says "you need 5+ years to break in" (long runway) ### Step 2: Build a Proof-of-Work Project Do the work before you have the job. **Examples**: - Pivoting to data analysis → Build a public dashboard analyzing real data - Pivoting to UX design → Redesign a real product and document process - Pivoting to product marketing → Write 3 go-to-market case studies - Pivoting to operations → Create a process optimization framework with examples **Why this matters**: Employers don't believe career switchers. They need proof you can do the work. A portfolio beats a resume. **Timeline**: 4-8 weeks to build a credible project ### Step 3: Test the Market With "Bridge Roles" You might not land your dream pivot role immediately. Bridge roles get you closer. **Bridge role strategy**: - Find roles that value BOTH your old expertise AND new direction - Example: Engineer pivoting to PM → "Technical PM" roles - Example: Marketer pivoting to sales → "Product Marketing" (overlaps both) **Why it works**: Lower risk for employer (you have relevant background), faster for you (don't have to prove everything from scratch). ## The Resume Rebrand for Pivot Your resume currently says "I'm an [old role]." You need it to say "I'm transitioning to [new role] and here's why I'll be great." ### Strategy 1: The Hybrid Title **Old title**: "Software Engineer" **New title**: "Software Engineer Transitioning to Product Management" **Why it works**: Sets expectations immediately, filters for hiring managers open to career changers ### Strategy 2: The Skills-First Resume Flip the format: 1. **Skills section at top**: List 5-6 skills relevant to new role with proof 2. **Projects section**: Showcase portfolio work 3. **Experience**: Rebrand your past work using new role's language **Example** (Marketer → Product Manager): **Skills**: - Product strategy: Led go-to-market for 3 product launches ($12M revenue) - Data analysis: Built attribution model reducing CAC by 23% - Cross-functional leadership: Coordinated eng, design, sales teams **Projects**: - Product teardown case study (link) - Competitive analysis framework (link) - Mock PRD for [Company] product (link) ### Strategy 3: The Narrative Summary Add a 3-sentence summary at the top: "Marketing leader with 7 years driving product launches and growth strategy, transitioning to product management. Recently completed [course/certification] and built [project]. Seeking product roles where my customer insights and go-to-market expertise add strategic value." **Why it works**: Tells the story for them. Hiring managers are lazy—make it easy to see the connection. ## The Financial Reality of Pivoting Most pivots involve a temporary pay cut. Plan for it. **Typical pay changes by pivot type**: | Pivot Type | Initial Pay Change | Break-Even Timeline | |------------|-------------------|---------------------| | Same skills, different industry | 0-10% decrease | 1-2 years | | Same industry, different role | 10-20% decrease | 2-3 years | | Adjacent pivot | 20-30% decrease | 3-4 years | | Complete career change | 30-50% decrease | 4-5 years | **Example**: You made $120k as a senior engineer. You pivot to product management at $90k (25% cut). You're back to $120k in year 3, and at $150k by year 5. **The math**: Is 2-3 years of lower pay worth 20-30 years in a career you actually enjoy? For most people: yes. **How to afford it**: - Negotiate severance to cover the gap - Freelance in your old field while building new skills (hybrid income) - Target bridge roles that pay 10-15% less (not 30%) - Start the pivot while employed at your next role (if you take a "repeat" job first to stabilize) ## The Skill-Building Plan You need credibility. Here's how to build it fast. ### Option 1: Intensive Courses (4-12 weeks) **Best for**: Skills with clear curriculum (coding, data analysis, design) **Examples**: - Coding: Le Wagon, Hack Reactor, App Academy (12-16 weeks, $15k-20k) - Data analysis: DataCamp, Udacity Nanodegree (3-6 months, $500-1,500) - UX Design: Springboard, Designlab (6-9 months, $5k-7k) - Product management: Product School, Reforge (8-12 weeks, $2k-4k) **ROI**: High if you finish and build portfolio. Low if you quit halfway. ### Option 2: Self-Guided Learning + Portfolio (3-6 months) **Best for**: Motivated self-learners, tight budget **How**: 1. Pick 2-3 online courses (Coursera, Udemy, YouTube) 2. Build 3 real projects applying what you learned 3. Document process and results publicly (blog, GitHub, portfolio site) **Cost**: $0-300 **Credibility**: Depends entirely on portfolio quality ### Option 3: Freelance Projects (2-4 months) **Best for**: Roles where you can "fake it till you make it" with starter projects **How**: - Upwork, Fiverr, or direct outreach - Charge 50-70% below market rate initially to get projects - Use first 3-5 projects as portfolio pieces **Examples**: - Want to be a copywriter? Write 5 landing pages for startups - Want to be a data analyst? Analyze 3 companies' public data - Want to be a UX designer? Redesign 5 terrible mobile apps **Cost**: $0 (you're earning while learning) ## The Timeline Reality Check Most people underestimate pivot timeline by 2-3x. **Realistic timeline for adjacent pivot** (e.g., engineer → product manager): - Month 1: Research and validation (informational interviews) - Month 2-3: Skill building (courses, portfolio projects) - Month 4: Application prep (resume rebrand, portfolio site) - Month 5-7: Active job search (applications, networking, interviews) - Month 8: Offer and negotiation **Total**: 8 months on average (some faster, most slower) **If your runway is less than this**: Either extend runway (part-time work, side income, negotiated severance) OR take a "repeat" role first to stabilize, then pivot internally later. ## The "Stabilize First, Pivot Second" Strategy Controversial take: It's often smarter to take the same role at a new company (fast, familiar) and THEN pivot once you're employed. **Why this works**: - You're interviewing from position of strength (employed) - You have income while building new skills nights/weekends - You can apply for internal transfers (easier than external pivot) **Real case**: Mike, laid off from marketing role. Took another marketing job in 6 weeks to stabilize income. Spent 9 months building product management skills. Applied internally for PM role, got it. Total timeline: 15 months, but financially secure the whole time. **When to do this**: If runway is less than 6 months AND you have dependents/mortgage. ## Your Next Action: The Pivot Decision Matrix Fill this out honestly: **My runway**: ______ months **My current role satisfaction** (1-10): ______ **My risk tolerance** (1-10): ______ **My pivot type** (1-4 from above): ______ **If runway ≥ 6 AND satisfaction ≤ 6 AND tolerance ≥ 6**: Go for the pivot **If runway < 4 OR tolerance < 5**: Take repeat role, pivot later **If unsure**: Spend 2 weeks doing validation interviews before committing
Job Search Intensity: Sprint vs Marathon Strategy
By Templata • 6 min read
## The Volume Trap You got laid off. Everyone tells you: "Job searching IS your full-time job now. Apply to 100 jobs/week!" So you do. You blast your resume to every remotely relevant posting. You customize nothing. You spray and pray. **Result**: 2% response rate, zero interviews, and you're burned out by week 3. Here's what actually works. ## The Data on Application Volume vs Quality **Study of 5,000 job seekers (TopResume 2024)**: | Applications/Week | Response Rate | Interviews/Week | Avg. Time to Offer | |-------------------|---------------|-----------------|---------------------| | 50+ (spray) | 1-3% | 0.5 | Never or 6+ months | | 20-30 (moderate) | 5-8% | 1-2 | 4-5 months | | 5-10 (targeted) | 15-25% | 2-4 | 2-3 months | **The math**: 10 targeted applications at 20% response = 2 interviews. 50 spray applications at 2% response = 1 interview. Same output, 5x less work. > "I applied to 200 jobs in my first month. Got 4 interviews, no offers. Switched to 2-3 applications per day with heavy customization and referrals. Next month: 15 applications, 7 interviews, 2 offers." - Software engineer on Blind The intensity that matters isn't application volume. It's effort per application and strategic focus. ## The Three Job Search Intensities Your intensity should match your runway and situation. ### Sprint Mode (Runway < 3 months) **Goal**: Get ANY acceptable job as fast as possible **Timeline**: 4-8 weeks **Daily schedule**: 6-8 hours/day, 6 days/week **Time allocation**: - 40%: High-volume applications (15-20/day) - 30%: Network activation (10+ people/day) - 20%: Interview prep and skills refresh - 10%: Mental health and recovery **When to use**: - Financial emergency - No severance or unemployment benefits - Dependents relying on your income - No savings buffer **Tradeoffs**: You'll probably take a lateral move or slight step back. You're optimizing for speed, not perfect fit. **Tactics**: - Apply to every role you're 60%+ qualified for - Use AI tools to customize cover letters at scale (ChatGPT, Jasper) - Set up job alerts to apply within 1 hour of posting - Contract/temp roles count—get cash flow first ### Marathon Mode (Runway 4-8 months) **Goal**: Find the right role at the right company **Timeline**: 3-5 months **Daily schedule**: 4-5 hours/day, 5 days/week **Time allocation**: - 25%: Targeted applications (2-3/day, heavily customized) - 35%: Networking and referrals (5-8 conversations/week) - 20%: Interview prep and case studies - 20%: Skill building (courses, projects, portfolio) **When to use**: - Comfortable runway (6+ months) - Mid-to-senior level roles - You want to be selective about culture/role - Opportunity to level up **Tactics**: - Only apply to roles you genuinely want - Always try to get a referral first - Customize resume and cover letter for each application - Research company/team deeply before applying ### Pivot Mode (Runway 6+ months OR decided to change careers) **Goal**: Successfully transition to new industry/role **Timeline**: 6-12 months **Daily schedule**: 3-4 hours/day job search, 2-3 hours/day skill building **Time allocation**: - 20%: Applications (1-2/day, roles that bridge old→new) - 30%: Networking in NEW field (informational interviews) - 30%: Skill building (courses, certifications, portfolio projects) - 20%: Content creation (blog, LinkedIn, proof of expertise) **When to use**: - You have the financial cushion to invest in transition - Your industry is declining - You hate your field and want out - Clear opportunity in another field **Tactics**: - Target "bridge roles" that value your transferable skills - Build proof-of-work projects in new field - Get coffee chats with 20+ people in target industry - Consider unpaid internship/apprenticeship if it unlocks the door ## The Daily Job Search Schedule (Marathon Mode) Most people waste hours refreshing job boards. Here's a structured day: **9:00-10:00am: Research & Target Selection** - Identify 5-10 companies you want to work for - Find 2-3 open roles that fit - Research: company news, team structure, hiring manager LinkedIn **10:00-11:30am: Application Customization** - Customize resume for 2-3 roles (highlight relevant experience) - Write tailored cover letter (reference specific company initiatives) - Find referral or warm intro if possible **11:30am-12:00pm: Submit + Track** - Submit applications - Update your job search spreadsheet (company, role, date, contact, status) - Set follow-up reminders **12:00-1:00pm: Break** **1:00-2:30pm: Networking** - Send 5-10 connection requests on LinkedIn - Reply to messages and InMails - Set up 1-2 coffee chats or calls for the week **2:30-3:30pm: Skill Building** - Online course, read industry content, work on portfolio project - Update LinkedIn with new skills/certifications **3:30-4:00pm: Interview Prep** - Practice behavioral questions - Research companies you're interviewing with - Mock interviews (use Pramp, Interviewing.io, or friends) **Total**: 5 hours of focused work. More effective than 8 hours of unfocused applying. ## The Job Search Spreadsheet You Need Track everything or you'll lose track fast. **Columns** (use Google Sheets or Airtable): - Company name - Role title - Date applied - Application method (direct, referral, recruiter) - Contact name (recruiter, hiring manager) - Status (applied, phone screen, interview, offer, rejected) - Follow-up date - Notes (interview feedback, comp range, red flags) **Why this matters**: - Prevents double-applying to same company - Reminds you to follow up - Shows you patterns (e.g., "I never get past phone screen—I need interview coaching") ## The Referral Strategy (10x Your Response Rate) **Reality**: Referrals get 6-10x higher response rates than cold applications. **The math**: If you apply cold to 20 jobs, you might get 2-4 interviews. If you get referrals for 10 jobs, you'll get 3-5 interviews from those alone. **How to get referrals**: ### Tactic 1: LinkedIn 2nd-degree connections 1. Find role on company website 2. LinkedIn search: "[Company name] [your role or adjacent]" 3. Filter by 2nd-degree connections (you have a mutual contact) 4. Message the mutual: "Hey [name], I'm applying to [role] at [company]. I saw you know [contact]. Would you be willing to intro me?" **Success rate**: 40-50% will make the intro ### Tactic 2: Alumni networks - Search "[Your university] alumni at [company]" on LinkedIn - Alumni are culturally obligated to help—use it - Message: "Hi [name], fellow [University] alum here. I'm interested in [role] at [company]. Would love to hear about your experience there." **Success rate**: 50-60% will respond ### Tactic 3: Industry Slack/Discord communities - Join 3-5 industry communities (e.g., Rands Leadership Slack, OnDeck, Product Hunt) - Post in #job-search: "Looking for [role]. Happy to return the favor. DM me if your company is hiring." - Companies actively recruiting will reach out ### Tactic 4: Direct recruiter outreach - Find the recruiter for specific role (usually tagged in LinkedIn job posts) - Message: "Hi [name], saw you're hiring for [role]. I have [X years] experience with [relevant skill]. Here's my resume: [link]. Happy to chat this week." **Success rate**: 30-40% will respond ## The Follow-Up Strategy (That Doesn't Annoy) You applied 2 weeks ago. No response. Should you follow up? **Yes, once.** Here's how: **Week 2 after applying** (email to recruiter or hiring manager): "Hi [name], I applied for [role] on [date]. I'm very interested in this opportunity because [specific reason related to company/role]. I have [X years] experience in [relevant area] and recently [specific achievement relevant to role]. Happy to provide any additional information. Are you available for a brief call this week? Best, [Your name]" **Response rate**: 15-25% will reply (better than nothing) **If no response**: Move on. Don't follow up again. They saw it. ## The Warning Signs You Need to Adjust Intensity ### Sign 1: It's been 4+ weeks, fewer than 3 interviews **Problem**: Volume too low OR quality too low **Fix**: If applying to 5/week → increase to 10. If applying to 30/week → decrease to 10 but add referrals. ### Sign 2: Lots of phone screens, no final-round interviews **Problem**: You're passing initial filter but failing deeper evaluation **Fix**: Not intensity issue—this is skills or interview performance. Get coaching. ### Sign 3: Burned out, depressed, avoiding job search **Problem**: Intensity too high, no recovery time **Fix**: Scale back to 3 hours/day. Add exercise, therapy, social time. Marathon, not sprint. ### Sign 4: Interviews but no offers **Problem**: You're getting in the door but not closing **Fix**: Not intensity issue—this is interview skills or negotiation. Practice with interview.io or coach. ## The "Should I Take a Break?" Question You've been searching for 8 weeks straight. You're exhausted. Should you take a week off? **Unpopular answer**: No, but adjust intensity. **Why not**: Job searching has momentum. A week off means: - Your network forgets you're looking - You miss new postings (best candidates apply in first 48 hours) - Psychological reset makes it harder to restart **What to do instead**: - Drop to 50% intensity for 1 week (2 hours/day instead of 5) - Focus only on networking and relationship maintenance - No new applications, just keep existing conversations warm - Use the time for skill building or mental health **Exception**: If you're clinically depressed or having suicidal thoughts, stop and get professional help immediately. Your mental health matters more than job search momentum. ## The Transition Point: When to Change Intensity **Sprint → Marathon**: When you get a job offer (even imperfect) - You now have a backup plan - Can afford to be selective about next moves **Marathon → Sprint**: When runway drops below 3 months - Financial urgency overrides selectivity - Shift to volume and speed **Pivot → Marathon**: When you've built enough credibility in new field - Portfolio projects done - Certifications earned - Now treat it like normal job search ## Your Week 1 Intensity Audit Answer these: 1. What's my runway? (months) 2. What's my must-have salary? (can I take a step back if needed?) 3. What's my primary goal? (speed, fit, pivot) 4. How much time can I commit daily? (realistically, not aspirationally) **Then choose**: - Runway < 3mo → Sprint - Runway 4-8mo → Marathon - Runway 6+mo + career change → Pivot Adjust every 4 weeks based on results.
LinkedIn After Layoff: The Open-to-Work Signal Debate
By Templata • 6 min read
## The Most Controversial Decision in Your Job Search You've been laid off. You open LinkedIn. You see the "Open to Work" option—the green #OpenToWork banner on your profile photo. Should you turn it on? **The conflicting advice**: - Career coaches: "Yes, it signals availability and gets you in front of recruiters!" - Hiring managers: "No, it makes you look desperate and damages your negotiating power!" Both are right. Here's when to use it and when to avoid it. ## What the Data Actually Shows **LinkedIn's internal data (2024)**: - Profiles with Open to Work turned on: 40% more likely to get recruiter messages - However: 18% lower average starting salary than those who didn't use it **Survey of 500+ recruiters (Jobvite 2024)**: - 53% said the green banner makes them more likely to reach out - 47% said it signals "desperation" or "no other options" So it's literally a coin flip. The question isn't "does it work?" but "what are you optimizing for?" > "If your goal is maximum interview volume, turn it on. If your goal is maintaining negotiating leverage and position of strength, turn it off. You can't optimize for both." - Recruiter quote from Ask a Manager ## The Two-Strategy Framework Your LinkedIn approach depends on your runway and market position. ### Strategy A: Speed Optimization (Use Open to Work) **When to use**: - Financial runway less than 4 months - Mass layoff in your industry (e.g., tech in 2023-2024) - Junior-to-mid level role (less negotiating power anyway) - Niche skill set where you need maximum visibility **How it works**: - Turn on "Open to Work" with green banner (visible to all) - Update headline to: "[Your Role] | Actively Seeking [Type] Roles | [Key Skills]" - Example: "Senior Product Manager | Actively Seeking B2B SaaS Roles | Growth, Analytics, AI" **What you get**: - 2-3x more recruiter InMails - Faster interview pipeline (typically 2-3 weeks to first interview vs 4-6 weeks) - Higher volume, lower average offer **The tradeoff**: You lose the "I'm being selective" positioning. You're clearly available and actively searching. ### Strategy B: Leverage Optimization (Avoid Open to Work) **When to use**: - Financial runway 6+ months - Senior/executive role where positioning matters - Competitive market where scarcity creates value - You want to appear selective and in-demand **How it works**: - Do NOT turn on Open to Work banner - Update headline to: "[Your Role] | [Recent Company] | [Accomplishment]" - Example: "VP Product | Former Stripe | Built 0→$50M Product Line" - Set "Open to Work" to recruiters only (no green banner) **What you get**: - Fewer recruiter InMails (30-40% less volume) - Higher quality conversations (less spam) - Better negotiating position ("I'm being selective") - 10-20% higher average starting salary **The tradeoff**: Slower pipeline, requires more proactive outreach on your end. ## The Hybrid Approach (What Savvy Job Seekers Do) Most career coaches won't tell you this: You can change it. **Week 1-4**: Strategy B (no banner) - Gives you time to reach out to top-choice companies directly - Protects your positioning for dream roles - Lets you test if your network generates enough leads **Week 5+**: Switch to Strategy A (turn on banner) - If you're not getting enough traction, flip the switch - Increase volume to speed up timeline - Accept the tradeoff: more leads, less leverage **The metric**: If you're not getting 3-5 interviews/week by week 4, turn on the banner. ## The Headline Strategy (More Important Than the Banner) Your LinkedIn headline is 10x more important than the Open to Work banner. It's the first thing recruiters see in search results. **Bad headlines (what most people do)**: ❌ "Seeking New Opportunities" - Says nothing about what you do or offer - Filters you out of specific role searches ❌ "Product Manager at [Company]" - Doesn't work if you're laid off—recruiters see the company and think you're still there - Misses chance to showcase skills **Good headlines (what gets you found)**: ✅ "Senior Software Engineer | Python, AWS, ML | Ex-Google" - Role + Skills + Credibility - Shows up in searches for "Senior Software Engineer Python" ✅ "B2B SaaS Sales | $4M Quota Crusher | Actively Interviewing" - Role + Achievement + Availability - "Actively Interviewing" is softer than Open to Work banner ✅ "VP Marketing | Grew [Company] 0→10M ARR | Exploring CMO Roles" - Level + Specific Win + What You Want - "Exploring" implies selectivity **The formula**: [Role/Title] | [Key Achievement or Skills] | [Availability Signal] ## What to Do With Your Experience Section **The last role problem**: Your current/most recent role now says "[Company] · 3 yrs 2 mos" Recruiters will assume you still work there unless you signal otherwise. **Option 1: Add end date** - Change to: "Jan 2022 - Dec 2024 · 3 yrs" - Clean, professional - Downside: Makes the gap obvious if job search takes a while **Option 2: Add layoff context in description** - Keep dates, but add to top of description: "*Role eliminated in company-wide restructuring, Dec 2024*" - Clarifies it was layoff, not performance - Downside: Draws attention to the layoff **Option 3: Update title to past tense** - "Former Senior Analyst at [Company]" - Signals you're no longer there - Downside: Looks odd if you do this too early **Recommendation**: Option 1 (add end date) is cleanest for most people. ## The Activity Strategy: What to Post Posting on LinkedIn during your job search serves two purposes: 1. Keeps you visible in your network's feed 2. Demonstrates expertise and thought leadership **What to post** (once every 3-5 days): **Post Type 1: The Announcement** (Week 1) "I was affected by [Company]'s layoffs. I'm looking for [role] roles where I can [value]. If you're hiring or know someone who is, let's connect." **Post Type 2: The Skill Showcase** (Ongoing) "Something I learned building [project]: [specific insight]. Here's how other teams can apply it..." - Shows you're still sharp and thinking about your craft - Keeps you in feed without being "please hire me" **Post Type 3: The Industry Commentary** (Ongoing) Comment on relevant news, trends, or insights in your field - Example: "The new [regulation/product/trend] changes everything for [industry]. Here's what I'm watching..." **Post Type 4: The Value-Add** (Ongoing) Share a resource, template, or framework you've built - "Here's the [spreadsheet/checklist/framework] I used to [achieve result]. Feel free to copy it." **Posting frequency**: 2-3x per week maximum. More than that looks desperate. ## The Settings You Should Change Beyond the Open to Work banner, optimize these: **1. Creator Mode**: Turn it ON - Puts "Follow" button prominently on your profile - Shows your top topics (choose 5 hashtags related to your role) - Increases visibility in search **2. Profile Privacy**: Make everything public - Let recruiters see your full profile without connecting - Under Settings → Visibility → Profile viewing options → Public **3. Recruiter Features**: Turn on "Let recruiters know you're open" - This is DIFFERENT from the green banner - Only visible to recruiters using LinkedIn Recruiter (the paid tool) - No downside to turning this on **4. Job Preferences**: Fill out completely - Job titles, locations, remote/hybrid/onsite, start date - Recruiters filter by these—blank = you don't show up ## The Connection Request Strategy You need to proactively reach out, not just wait for recruiters. **Who to connect with** (10-20 new connections per day): 1. **Recruiters at target companies** - Search: "[Company name] recruiter [your role]" - Message: "Hi [name], I'm exploring [role] opportunities at [company]. I have [X years] experience in [skill]. Would love to connect." 2. **Hiring managers in your function** - Search: "[Role title] at [company]" - Message: "Hi [name], saw your work on [specific project]. I'm a [role] looking for my next opportunity. Would love to learn more about your team." 3. **People who recently joined target companies** - They're freshest on the hiring process - Filter LinkedIn by "Past 30 days" in employment - Message: "Congrats on [new role] at [company]! I'm looking at opportunities there. Any chance you'd share what the interview process was like?" **Connection acceptance rate**: 30-50% will accept. Of those, 10-20% will lead to conversation. ## The Metrics That Matter Track these weekly: | Metric | Healthy Range | Action If Below | |--------|---------------|-----------------| | Profile views/week | 50-100+ | Post more, optimize headline, connect with more people | | Recruiter InMails/week | 3-10 | Turn on Open to Work, update headline, fill out job preferences | | Connection acceptances/week | 10-20 | Personalize requests more, target better | | Conversations started/week | 3-5 | More proactive outreach, better messages | **The leading indicator**: Profile views. If that's low, nothing else matters. ## The "Should I Remove My Layoff Post Later?" Question You posted about your layoff in week 1. Now it's week 8 and you're still searching. Should you delete it? **Don't delete it**. Here's why: 1. It's in people's memory anyway—deleting doesn't erase that 2. It shows authenticity (deleting looks like you're hiding something) 3. It might still generate leads—people see it months later **Instead**: Post new content that moves past it. Your most recent posts should be about your expertise, not your job search. ## Your Week 1 LinkedIn Checklist □ Decide: Speed optimization or leverage optimization? □ Update headline with role + skills/achievement + availability signal □ Add end date to most recent role □ Turn on "Let recruiters know you're open" (recruiter-only setting) □ Turn on Creator Mode □ Fill out job preferences completely □ Post your layoff announcement (or don't—both valid) □ Connect with 20 recruiters at target companies □ Connect with 20 people at target companies □ Set up weekly metrics tracking This is your storefront. Make it work for you.
The Layoff Networking Paradox: Why Hiding Makes It Worse
By Templata • 6 min read
## The Shame Spiral That Kills Job Searches You got laid off. Your first instinct: tell no one. Update your LinkedIn to "Taking time off." Avoid industry events. Deflect when friends ask about work. This feels safer. It's actually career suicide. > "Job seekers who disclose their layoff situation openly get hired 47% faster than those who hide it. The biggest predictor of job search length isn't skills or experience—it's networking volume in the first 30 days." - Lou Adler, Hire With Your Head Here's why hiding your layoff backfires, and what to say instead. ## The Data on Disclosure **Study of 2,500 laid-off professionals (LinkedIn/RiseSmart 2023)**: - Disclosed immediately ("Open to work" signal + posts): Average 3.2 months to hire - Disclosed selectively (told close contacts only): Average 4.8 months to hire - Hid it completely (vague status, avoided networking): Average 6.1 months to hire The difference between immediate disclosure and hiding: **2.9 months of unemployment**. At $100k salary, that's $24,000+ in lost income. Why does disclosure work? ## The Psychology of Layoff Stigma vs Reality **What you think people think**: "They got laid off because they weren't good at their job. Something must be wrong with them." **What people actually think**: "Oh wow, their company had layoffs. That's rough. I wonder if I can help." **The reality**: In 2024-2025, mass layoffs hit Google, Microsoft, Amazon, Meta, Salesforce, and hundreds more companies. Over 150,000 tech workers were laid off in 2024 alone. It's normalized. **The paradox**: The more you hide it, the more suspicious it looks. The more open you are, the more normal it seems. > "When someone says 'I was impacted by the Meta layoffs,' I think 'smart person caught in bad situation.' When someone says 'I'm exploring new opportunities,' I think 'they got fired for performance and won't admit it.'" - Engineering hiring manager, Blind forum ## The Network Activation Timeline **Day 1-3: Inner Circle (10-15 people)** Tell your closest professional contacts immediately. Not "when you feel ready." Not "after you've processed it." Immediately. **Who to tell**: - Former managers who liked you - Colleagues who left for other companies - Mentors or sponsors - Close friends in your industry - Recruiters you've worked with **What to say** (text/email template): "Hey [name], wanted to let you know I was affected by layoffs at [company] on [date]. I'm looking for [role type] roles in [industry/location]. If you hear of anything or know someone I should talk to, I'd really appreciate an intro. Hope you're doing well!" **Why this works**: - Direct, no shame - Specific ask (role + industry) - Low-friction (they just need to forward your name) - Acknowledges it's a favor **Response rate**: 60-80% will respond with either a lead, intro, or words of encouragement. ## Day 4-14: Outer Circle (50-100 people) Post on LinkedIn. Yes, publicly. This is the single highest-ROI action you can take. **The LinkedIn Post Template**: "I was impacted by [company]'s layoffs last week, along with [X] colleagues. I spent the last [X] years building [specific achievement/skill]. I'm incredibly proud of [specific win with numbers]. I'm now looking for [specific role] roles where I can [specific value you bring]. If you're hiring, know someone who is, or want to connect, please reach out. #OpenToWork #[YourIndustry] #[YourRole]" **Real example that worked**: "I was impacted by Stripe's layoffs on Thursday, along with 300+ talented people. I spent 4 years building their fraud detection system, reducing chargebacks by 34% and saving $12M annually. I'm now looking for Senior Product Manager roles in fintech/payments where I can drive measurable growth. If you're hiring or know someone who is, let's talk. #OpenToWork #ProductManagement #Fintech" **Results**: 47 comments, 15 DMs, 3 interview requests in 72 hours. **Why this works**: - Owns the situation without apologizing - Leads with achievement, not victimhood - Specific about what you want - Gives people a clear way to help ## The Three Types of Network Responses When you tell people you were laid off, you get three categories of responses: ### Type 1: The Helpers (30-40%) These people immediately offer: - Introductions to hiring managers - Job leads - Resume reviews - Practice interviews **Action**: Respond within 2 hours. Send your resume. Make it easy for them to help you. ### Type 2: The Encouragers (40-50%) "So sorry to hear that! You're talented, you'll land somewhere great." They mean well but offer no concrete help. **Action**: Convert them to helpers with a specific ask: "Thanks! Quick question—do you know anyone hiring for [role] at [type of company]? I'd love an intro." 50% of encouragers become helpers when asked directly. ### Type 3: The Ghosters (10-20%) They see your message and don't respond. **Action**: Nothing. Don't follow up. They're not going to help, and that's fine. Move on to people who will. ## What to Say in Different Situations ### At an industry event or conference **Them**: "What are you working on these days?" **Don't say**: "Oh, I'm in between things right now" (vague, sounds evasive) **Do say**: "I was at [Company] until last month when they had layoffs. Now I'm looking for [role]. Do you know anyone at [target company] I should talk to?" **Why it works**: Direct, positions you as actively job searching (positive), ends with an ask. ### A recruiter reaches out **Don't say**: "I'm currently exploring opportunities" (everyone says this) **Do say**: "Great timing—I'm actively looking. I was affected by [Company]'s layoffs two weeks ago. I'm looking for [role] at [stage/size] companies. Is this role a fit?" **Why it works**: Creates urgency, establishes you're available immediately, filters the opportunity. ### Former colleague asks why you left **Don't say**: "It was time for a change" (sounds like you were fired) **Do say**: "I was part of the layoffs in [month]. Company eliminated [X]% of [department]. Sad to leave the team, but excited about what's next." **Why it works**: Clarifies it was a layoff not performance, acknowledges the loss, pivots to future. ### Job interview: "Why did you leave your last role?" **Don't say**: "The company had financial problems" (sounds like blame) **Do say**: "[Company] had a 15% workforce reduction in [month]. My team was impacted. I'm grateful for my time there—I [specific achievement]—and I'm looking for a company where I can [specific value]." **Why it works**: Factual, not emotional. Pivots immediately to achievement and value. Shows you're forward-looking. ## The "I'm Embarrassed" Objection You might be thinking: "I get the logic, but I'm still embarrassed to tell people." **Reframe**: This isn't about your pride. It's about your family, your mortgage, your financial security. **The cost of embarrassment**: If hiding your layoff adds 2 months to your job search, and your salary is $80k, embarrassment costs you $13,333. **The benefit of disclosure**: Someone in your network knows someone who's hiring right now. But they can't help you if they don't know you're looking. > "I was too embarrassed to post on LinkedIn for 6 weeks. Finally did it. Got an interview request in 4 hours from someone I hadn't talked to in 5 years. Offer 3 weeks later. I wasted 6 weeks protecting my ego." - r/cscareerquestions thread ## The Weak Tie Advantage **Weak ties** (people you know but aren't close with) are more valuable than strong ties (close friends) for job searching. Why? Your close friends know the same people you know. Weak ties know different people—they bridge you to new networks. **Action**: Message 10 people you haven't talked to in 2+ years: "Hey [name]! It's been a while. I was affected by [company]'s layoffs and I'm looking for [role] roles. I know you're at [their company] now—would love to catch up and hear about what you're working on. Any chance you're free for coffee/call?" **Expected response rate**: 40-60% will respond. Of those, 30-40% will lead to an intro or job lead. ## The Warning Signs You're Hiding Too Much □ You haven't posted on LinkedIn about your layoff □ Fewer than 20 people know you're job searching □ You avoid industry events or networking opportunities □ You're only applying to jobs online (no referrals) □ You feel anxious when someone asks "What are you up to?" □ It's been 3+ weeks and you've had fewer than 5 networking conversations If you checked 3+, you're hiding too much. It's costing you time and money. ## Your Next 48 Hours **Today**: 1. Text 5 people from your inner circle using the template above 2. Post on LinkedIn using the template (or customize it) 3. Turn on LinkedIn's "Open to Work" signal (visible to recruiters only, or public—your choice) **Tomorrow**: 1. Message 10 weak ties you haven't talked to in years 2. Email 3 recruiters in your industry 3. Join 2 industry Slack/Discord communities and introduce yourself in #introductions **This week**: 1. Attend 1 industry event (even virtual) 2. Set up 3 coffee chats with people who responded 3. Ask each person: "Who else should I talk to?" The goal: 50+ people should know you're looking by end of week 2. That's how jobs happen.
Financial Runway Calculator: How Long You Actually Have
By Templata • 5 min read
## Why Your Mental Math Is Wrong You think: "I have $30,000 saved and spend $5,000/month, so I have 6 months." Reality: You have 3.5 months. Why? You forgot: - COBRA health insurance ($600-2,000/month) - Taxes on your severance (25-35% withholding) - Annual expenses that hit quarterly (car insurance, property tax) - The psychological tax (you'll spend more when stressed) > "The average person underestimates their monthly burn rate by 37% and overestimates their available cash by 23%. This is why people panic at month 3 instead of month 6." - Financial advisor quote from The Layoff Financial Survival Guide Let's build your actual runway calculation. ## The Real Runway Formula **Available Cash** = (Savings + Severance after tax + Unemployment) - (Emergency buffer) **True Monthly Burn** = (Regular expenses + Healthcare + Annual expenses/12 + Stress tax) **Actual Runway** = Available Cash ÷ True Monthly Burn Let's break down each component. ## Part 1: Calculate Available Cash ### Your Savings (Liquid only) - Checking account: $______ - Savings account: $______ - Easily accessible investments: $______ **Don't count**: 401(k) or IRA (early withdrawal = 10% penalty + taxes), home equity, illiquid assets ### Your Severance (After-Tax) If you're getting severance, it's taxable income. The company will withhold 22% federal (supplemental wage rate), plus state taxes. **Example**: $20,000 severance - Federal withholding (22%): -$4,400 - State tax (assume 5%): -$1,000 - Social Security/Medicare (7.65%): -$1,530 - **You actually receive**: ~$13,070 **Action**: Ask HR what your take-home will be, or use this calculator: Multiply severance by 0.65 for a conservative estimate. ### Unemployment Benefits **State maximum benefits (2024-2025 weekly):** | State | Weekly Max | Annual Equivalent | |-------|------------|-------------------| | Massachusetts | $1,129 | $58,708 | | Washington | $1,019 | $52,988 | | New Jersey | $830 | $43,160 | | California | $450 | $23,400 | | Florida | $275 | $14,300 | Check your state at: [CareerOneStop Unemployment Calculator](https://www.careeronestop.org/LocalHelp/UnemploymentBenefits/find-unemployment-benefits.aspx) **Key details**: - Most states: 26 weeks (6 months) maximum - Extended benefits kick in during high unemployment (not available as of 2025) - Severance might delay eligibility in some states - You must be actively job searching to qualify **Action**: Multiply your weekly benefit by 26, then multiply by 0.7 to account for taxes. ### Emergency Buffer (Subtract This) Set aside $2,000-5,000 that you absolutely will not touch except for true emergencies (medical, car breakdown, etc.). Why? If you drain your savings to zero and then have an emergency, you're forced into high-interest debt. This buffer prevents that. ## Part 2: Calculate True Monthly Burn ### Regular Monthly Expenses List every recurring expense: - Rent/mortgage: $______ - Utilities: $______ - Groceries: $______ - Transportation: $______ - Phone/internet: $______ - Subscriptions: $______ (Netflix, gym, etc.) - Minimum debt payments: $______ - Everything else: $______ **Don't estimate**. Check your last 3 months of bank statements and calculate the average. ### Healthcare (The Big One People Miss) If you're on your employer's health insurance, you'll need: **COBRA** (Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act) - Lets you keep your employer health plan for 18 months - You pay the full premium (what you paid + what employer paid) - **Average cost**: $600/month individual, $1,700/month family - Due: First payment due within 45 days of coverage start **ACA Marketplace** (Healthcare.gov or state exchange) - Can be cheaper than COBRA, especially with subsidies - Subsidy eligibility based on income (unemployment counts as income) - **Average cost**: $400-800/month individual with subsidies **Medicaid** - Free or low-cost if income is low enough - Eligibility varies by state - No asset test in most states (your savings don't disqualify you) **Action**: Get quotes from both COBRA (your termination packet) and Healthcare.gov. Choose the cheaper option. Budget for the higher number to be safe. ### Annual Expenses (Divided by 12) These are the killers people forget: - Car insurance (paid every 6 months): $______ ÷ 6 = $______/month - Property tax or renter's insurance: $______ ÷ 12 - Professional licenses or memberships: $______ ÷ 12 - Amazon Prime, Costco, etc.: $______ ÷ 12 - Gifts (birthdays, holidays): Estimate $1,200/year ÷ 12 = $100/month ### The Stress Tax (Add 15%) When you're stressed, you spend more. You order delivery instead of cooking. You buy coffee instead of making it. You stress-buy things on Amazon at 2am. > "I thought I spent $4,000/month. I tracked every dollar during my 5-month job search. Reality: $4,850/month. The stress tax is real." - Reddit r/personalfinance layoff thread **Action**: Multiply your total monthly burn by 1.15 to account for this. ## The Runway Calculator (Real Example) **Sarah's Situation**: - Savings: $25,000 - Severance: $15,000 gross ($9,750 after tax) - Unemployment: $450/week × 26 weeks = $11,700 gross ($8,190 after tax) - Emergency buffer: -$3,000 **Available Cash** = $25,000 + $9,750 + $8,190 - $3,000 = **$39,940** **Monthly Expenses**: - Rent: $1,800 - Utilities: $200 - Groceries: $500 - Transportation: $300 - Phone/internet: $150 - Subscriptions: $80 - Student loans (minimum): $350 - Miscellaneous: $400 - **Regular burn**: $3,780/month **Healthcare**: COBRA $650/month (vs $500/month with ACA subsidy) - she chooses ACA **Annual expenses**: - Car insurance: $1,200/year ÷ 12 = $100/month - Gifts/holidays: $100/month - **Annual burn**: $200/month **Stress tax**: ($3,780 + $500 + $200) × 1.15 = **$5,152/month** **Sarah's Actual Runway** = $39,940 ÷ $5,152 = **7.75 months** Not the 10+ months she initially thought. ## The Expense Optimization Hierarchy If your runway is uncomfortably short (less than 4 months), cut expenses in this order: ### Phase 1: Painless Cuts (Do immediately) - Cancel unused subscriptions: $50-200/month - Switch to cheaper phone plan: $30-50/month - Pause gym (work out at home): $30-100/month - Stop eating out: $200-500/month - **Potential savings**: $300-800/month ### Phase 2: Lifestyle Adjustments (Month 2 if job search isn't progressing) - Negotiate rent reduction or find roommate: $200-600/month - Sell car, use rideshare: $200-500/month (car payment + insurance + gas) - Pause retirement contributions: $200-800/month (if you have freelance income) - Switch to Medicaid if eligible: $400-1,700/month - **Potential savings**: $1,000-2,500/month ### Phase 3: Emergency Measures (Month 4 if still unemployed) - Move in with family/friends: $1,000-2,500/month - Defer student loans: $200-500/month - Negotiate credit card interest rates: $50-200/month - Side gig income (Uber, freelance): +$800-2,000/month ## The Income Acceleration Options Beyond cutting expenses, you can extend runway by adding income: **Freelance/Contract Work** - Use your professional skills: $30-150/hour - Platforms: Upwork, Toptal, Gun.io (tech), Taro (consulting) - **Warning**: May affect unemployment benefits in some states **Gig Economy** - Uber/Lyft: $15-25/hour after expenses - DoorDash/Instacart: $12-20/hour - TaskRabbit: $20-50/hour - **Advantage**: Completely flexible hours **Sell Stuff** - Electronics, furniture, clothes, tools - Average person has $2,000-5,000 of sellable items - OfferUp, Facebook Marketplace, Craigslist **Return Big Purchases** - Most stores: 30-90 day return window - Credit cards: Extended return protection - Check receipts from last 60 days ## The Month-by-Month Decision Tree **Month 1-2**: - Don't panic - Focus on job search full-time - Make Phase 1 cuts only - Keep routine and mental health stable **Month 3**: - Evaluate: Are you getting interviews? Offers? - If yes: Stay the course - If no: Implement Phase 2 cuts, consider broadening job search **Month 4**: - Critical decision point - Options: Take any job (even lower-paying), start freelancing aggressively, implement Phase 3 cuts **Month 5-6**: - If still unemployed: Something is wrong with your job search strategy - Get external help: Career coach, resume review, interview practice - Consider pivot: Different role, industry, or location ## The Opportunity Fund Strategy If your runway is comfortable (9+ months), don't spend the bare minimum. Instead, invest strategically: - Professional resume writer: $300-800 - Industry certifications: $200-2,000 - Networking events and conferences: $100-500 - Interview wardrobe: $200-500 - Career coach: $500-2,000 **Why**: These increase your job search speed and final offer. If they cut 1 month off your search, they've paid for themselves 10x over. ## Your Next Action Open a spreadsheet right now. Create these columns: 1. All savings sources → Total available cash 2. All monthly expenses → True monthly burn 3. Divide line 1 by line 2 → Your actual runway Then ask: "If I'm still unemployed in [runway - 2 months], what will I do?" Make that plan now, not when you're panicking.
Severance Negotiation: The 48-Hour Window Most People Miss
By Templata • 5 min read
## Why Companies Lowball Severance Your severance offer isn't based on fairness or what you deserve. It's based on risk management and how much negotiation friction they expect from you. > "Companies budget 2-3x their initial severance offers. They expect negotiation. If you don't ask, you're leaving their budget surplus on the table." - Employment Rights Attorney, Ask a Manager blog **The company's calculation**: - Legal risk (could you sue? for what?) - Retention of institutional knowledge - Public relations (are you likely to disparage them?) - Precedent (what have they paid others in similar situations?) **Your calculation should be**: - Financial runway you need - Market value of your benefits continuation - Enforceability of restrictions they're asking for Let's bridge that gap. ## The Severance Negotiation Framework Most people think severance is fixed. It's not. Here's what's actually negotiable, in order of likelihood: ### Tier 1: High Success Rate (60-80% of requests granted) **Extended health insurance coverage** - Standard offer: "COBRA information" (meaning you pay $600-2,000/month) - Counteroffer: Company-paid COBRA for 3-6 months - Why it works: It's pre-tax money for them, after-tax for you. They save on payroll taxes. **Neutral reference agreement** - Standard offer: Nothing in writing - Counteroffer: Signed agreement that references confirm only dates and title - Why it works: Costs them nothing, eliminates their liability risk **Outplacement services** - Standard offer: Maybe a PDF with job search tips - Counteroffer: 3-6 months of professional outplacement ($3,000-5,000 value) - Why it works: They have corporate contracts with providers at bulk rates ### Tier 2: Moderate Success Rate (30-50% of requests granted) **Additional severance weeks** - Standard offer: 1-2 weeks per year of service - Counteroffer: 2-4 weeks per year, or +4-8 weeks flat increase - Why it works: If you have any legal leverage (protected class, suspicious timing), they'd rather pay than litigate **Accelerated equity vesting** - Standard offer: Unvested stock is forfeited - Counteroffer: Partial acceleration or extended exercise window - Why it works: Only works at startups with discretion, but can be worth $10,000s ### Tier 3: Low Success Rate (10-30% of requests granted) **Non-compete waiver** - Standard offer: Broad non-compete preventing you from working in your field - Counteroffer: Remove entirely or narrow to specific competitors only - Why it works: Non-competes are unenforceable in many states anyway, but getting written waiver helps **Performance bonus or commission owed** - Standard offer: Pro-rated or forfeited - Counteroffer: Full amount as if you'd stayed through payment date - Why it works: If you can prove you earned it before termination ## The Three Leverage Multipliers Your negotiating power isn't equal. Here's what increases it: ### Multiplier 1: Protected Class Status If you're over 40, pregnant, on medical leave, or recently filed an HR complaint, your leverage is 3-5x higher. Why? The company's legal risk skyrockets. Age discrimination lawsuits average $100,000-300,000 to defend, even if they win. **Real example**: Maria, 54, laid off after 8 years. Initial offer: 8 weeks. After mentioning she'd recently reported gender discrimination, offer jumped to 24 weeks + 6 months health insurance. **Action**: You don't threaten to sue. You simply state facts: "I'm 52 years old and this layoff happened 2 weeks after my performance review rated me 'exceeds expectations.'" Let them connect the dots. ### Multiplier 2: Documented Performance If you have recent positive performance reviews, promotion, or awards, you have proof the layoff wasn't performance-based. **Action**: In your negotiation email, cite specific achievements: "In my last review (Q3 2024), I was rated 'exceeds expectations' and received the Innovation Award for [project]." ### Multiplier 3: Institutional Knowledge If you're the only person who knows critical systems, processes, or client relationships, you have "transition value." **The offer**: "I'm happy to create comprehensive documentation and train my replacement over the next 2-4 weeks. In exchange, I'd like extended severance through that period." **Why it works**: They need smooth transition more than they need to save a few weeks of pay. ## The Negotiation Email Sequence **Email 1: The Ask (Send 5-7 days after initial offer)** "Thank you for the severance package presented on [date]. I appreciate [X years] with the company and want to reach a mutual agreement. After reviewing the offer, I'd like to discuss: - Severance pay: [Specific number] weeks - Health insurance: [Specific months] of company-paid COBRA - Neutral reference: Written confirmation - [Other specific request] Based on my [specific contributions/circumstances], I believe this is fair. Are you available this week to discuss?" **Why this works**: Specific numbers, professional tone, frames it as mutual benefit. **Email 2: The Follow-Up (If no response after 3-4 days)** "Following up on my email from [date]. I'd like to finalize this agreement by [specific date, typically 14 days from initial offer]. Please let me know your availability to discuss." **Why this works**: Creates soft deadline, shows you're serious. **Email 3: The Compromise (If they counter-offer)** "Thanks for your response. I understand [their constraint]. Would you be open to [alternative]: [Specific compromise that gets you 70-80% of what you want]?" **Example compromise matrix**: | You Asked For | They Offered | Smart Compromise | |---------------|--------------|------------------| | 16 weeks pay | 10 weeks | 13 weeks + 3 months health insurance | | 6 months COBRA | 0 months | 3 months COBRA + outplacement services | | Full equity vest | 0 acceleration | 50% acceleration or extended exercise window | ## What If They Say No to Everything? You have three options: **Option 1: Sign and walk away** If the initial offer is reasonable (4+ weeks, covers your runway) and you have no leverage, sometimes the best move is to accept and redirect energy to job search. **Option 2: Get an attorney** If you suspect discrimination, retaliation, or wage violations, a one-hour consultation costs $200-400. Many employment attorneys work on contingency if you have a strong case. **Option 3: Strategic concession** "I understand the severance amount is fixed. Would you consider [smaller ask]: neutral reference agreement in writing and introduction to [industry contact]?" Get something even if you can't get everything. ## The Signature Timing Strategy Never sign on the day they request. Even if you plan to accept their offer unchanged, wait 5-7 days. Why? 1. It signals you're taking it seriously (makes future negotiations credible) 2. It gives them time to reconsider and potentially sweeten the offer 3. It protects you legally (courts look more favorably on agreements that weren't rushed) 4. You might discover information that changes your leverage > "I was about to sign when I learned via LinkedIn that 3 other people on my team were also laid off—all over 50. That changed everything. I got an attorney and my severance tripled." - Former Amazon employee, Blind forum ## Red Flags in Severance Agreements Before you sign, have an attorney review for: **Overly broad releases** - "You release all claims known or unknown" can waive rights to unpaid wages or discrimination you haven't discovered yet **Non-disparagement that's one-sided** - You can't talk about them, but they can talk about you **Clawback provisions** - They can demand money back if you "violate" vague terms **Unconscionable non-competes** - "Cannot work in technology industry for 2 years" (likely unenforceable but expensive to fight) **Confidentiality that limits legal rights** - You can't tell anyone about the agreement (illegal in many states) ## The Math of Negotiation Let's say you're offered 8 weeks severance. You want 16 weeks. That's 8 weeks difference. If your salary is $120,000/year: - 8 additional weeks = $18,461 - Time to negotiate: 3-5 hours total - Effective hourly rate: $3,692-6,154/hour Even if you only get 4 additional weeks, that's $9,230 for a few hours of professional emails. There's no higher ROI activity during a layoff. ## Your Next Step Before your next call with HR, write down: 1. Your minimum acceptable outcome (the number you need to survive) 2. Your target outcome (what would make you feel fairly compensated) 3. Your leverage factors (age, performance, institutional knowledge, protected class status) 4. Your three most important asks in priority order Then send the negotiation email. The worst they can say is no—and you're already laid off.
The First 72 Hours After a Layoff: A Legal and Financial Checklist
By Templata • 5 min read
## The Window of Maximum Leverage You have roughly 48-72 hours after receiving layoff news when the company is most willing to negotiate. After that, HR moves on and your leverage evaporates. Yet most people spend this time in shock, being "professional," and missing critical opportunities. > "The biggest mistake I see is people signing severance agreements same-day without reading them. You can't unsign a release." - Donna Ballman, Employee Rights Attorney Here's your hour-by-hour playbook for the first three days. ## Hour 1-4: Document Everything (Before You Leave) **Get it in writing immediately:** - Exact termination date and reason given - Details of any severance offer (weeks of pay, benefits continuation, outplacement) - Your final paycheck amount and when you'll receive it - Status of unvested stock, bonuses, commission owed - Return timeline for company property **Action**: Email yourself (personal email) a summary of the conversation. Forward any termination documents to your personal email. Take photos of your offer letter, recent performance reviews, and any awards or positive feedback. Why this matters: You need a paper trail. Memories fade, but if you later discover age discrimination or retaliation, you need contemporary documentation. ## Hour 4-24: DO NOT Sign Anything Most companies present a severance agreement and encourage you to sign immediately. This is a trap. **The standard severance agreement includes:** - A release waiving your right to sue for discrimination, wrongful termination, wage violations - Non-disparagement clauses (you can't talk badly about the company) - Confidentiality terms - Non-compete restrictions (varies by state) **What they don't tell you**: Federal law (OWBPA) requires they give you 21 days to review if you're over 40, or 7 days if younger. Some states require even more time. > "I increased my severance from 4 weeks to 12 weeks just by asking. The first offer is never the final offer." - Former Twitter employee, TechCrunch layoff coverage **Action**: Respond professionally: "I appreciate the offer. I'd like to review this with an attorney before signing. When is the deadline for my response?" Then actually talk to an employment attorney (many do free consultations). ## Hour 24-48: Calculate Your Real Severance Value Standard formula: 1-2 weeks per year of service. But this is highly negotiable, especially if: - You're in a protected class (over 40, pregnant, on medical leave) - You have evidence of discrimination or retaliation - Your role involved confidential information they want protected - The layoff timing is suspicious (right before bonus payout, after raising concerns) **What to negotiate for** (in priority order): | Item | Why It Matters | Typical Range | |------|---------------|---------------| | Additional severance weeks | Direct cash, most flexible | 2-16 weeks extra | | Extended health insurance | COBRA costs $600-2000/month | 3-6 months paid | | Outplacement services | Professional job search help | $3,000-5,000 value | | Neutral reference agreement | Protects future job prospects | In writing | | Accelerated equity vesting | Can be worth $10,000s | Partial acceleration | | Non-compete waiver | Lets you work anywhere | Remove or narrow | **Action**: Make a spreadsheet. Calculate your monthly burn rate. Determine your minimum acceptable runway (usually 3-6 months). Add 30% to that number—that's your counteroffer. ## Hour 48-72: File for Unemployment Immediately The #1 mistake: waiting to file because "I don't need it yet" or "I'll find something fast." **Reality check**: - Average tech job search is 4-6 months in 2024-2025 - Unemployment benefits take 2-4 weeks to process - Benefits are backdated only to your filing date, not termination date - You're entitled to it—you paid into it **The math**: If your state maximum is $800/week and you wait 3 weeks to file, you've lost $2,400. Forever. **Action**: Go to your state unemployment website TODAY. You need: - Your last employer's name, address, and FEIN (Federal Employer ID Number—ask HR) - Your last day of work - Reason for separation (they'll verify with employer) - Your direct deposit information File even if you're not sure you qualify. Let them decide. ## Hour 72: Secure Your Digital Life Before your company email and accounts are terminated: **Export immediately**: - LinkedIn connections (Settings → Data privacy → Get a copy of your data) - Work samples you created (check your employment agreement first) - Emails with positive feedback, performance reviews - Client contact information (if legally allowed) - Calendar of accomplishments for resume writing **Update before access is cut**: - LinkedIn headline and profile (do this strategically—see our LinkedIn positioning guide) - Personal contact info in your email signature - Forwarding notice to key contacts **Warning**: Do not take proprietary company information, code, or client lists that belong to the company. That's theft and can void your severance. ## The Counteroffer Email Template Send this 5-7 days after receiving the initial offer: "Thank you for the severance offer presented on [date]. After reviewing the agreement and considering my [X years] of service and [specific contributions], I'd like to discuss the following adjustments: - Severance pay: [Current offer + your increase] - Health insurance continuation: [Number] months fully covered - Neutral reference: Written agreement that references will confirm dates of employment and title only - [Other specific requests] I'm prepared to sign an agreement that works for both of us. Are you available to discuss this week?" **Why this works**: It's professional, specific, and frames it as a mutual agreement rather than a demand. ## What Happens If You Do Nothing If you sign the first agreement without negotiating: - You leave $5,000-25,000 on the table (typical for mid-level employees) - You waive rights you might need later - You lock in terms that hurt your next job search The company has lawyers. You should too—at least for a one-hour consultation ($200-400). It's the highest-ROI money you'll spend. ## Your Next 24 Hours 1. Email yourself all documentation (hour 1) 2. Schedule employment attorney consultation (hour 4) 3. Calculate your financial runway and counteroffer number (hour 24) 4. File for unemployment (hour 48) 5. Export your digital assets (hour 72) This is not the time to be "nice." This is the time to be strategic.
The Psychology of Salary Negotiation: Why Most Advice Fails
By Templata • 7 min read
# The Psychology of Salary Negotiation: Why Most Advice Fails Every salary negotiation article tells you the same thing: "Know your worth. Be confident. Don't accept the first offer." You follow that advice. You ask. You get a weak counter-offer or a "no." You wonder what went wrong. Here's what went wrong: **You're negotiating against human psychology—both yours and your manager's—and most advice ignores that.** This reading covers the four cognitive biases that kill salary negotiations, and the specific tactics to overcome each one. ## Why "Just Be Confident" Fails Confidence helps, but it's not enough. Your manager isn't a rational actor calculating fair market value. They're a human being with biases, constraints, and emotional reactions. Meanwhile, you're walking into the conversation with your own biases—fear of rejection, anchoring to your current salary, loss aversion. > "Negotiation isn't about logic. It's about understanding the emotional and cognitive patterns that drive decisions—and using them strategically." — Never Split the Difference by Chris Voss The best negotiators don't just "be confident." They understand the invisible forces shaping the conversation and design their strategy around them. ## Bias 1: Anchoring (The First Number Wins) **What it is**: The first number mentioned in a negotiation disproportionately influences the final outcome. This is called anchoring. **How it sabotages you**: Scenario A: Your manager says "We're thinking $95K." You wanted $110K. You counter with $105K. You settle at $100K. Scenario B: You say "I'm looking for $110K." Your manager counters with $102K. You settle at $106K. Same person, same situation. Different anchor = $6,000 difference. **The fix**: Anchor first, anchor high (but defensible). **How to do it**: - State your number before your manager states theirs - Make your number the high end of your research range (not the midpoint) - Back it up with data immediately **Script**: "Based on my research, the market range for this role is $105K to $120K. Given my contributions—[2 examples]—I'm asking for $115K." You anchored at $115K. Even if they counter lower, the negotiation revolves around your number. **What NOT to do**: - ❌ Let your manager anchor first ("What are you looking for?" → "What do you think is fair?") - ❌ Anchor with your current salary ("I make $85K now, so maybe $90K?") - ✅ Anchor with market data + your value **Real example**: Ava was making $68K. She researched and found her market value was $82K-$95K. She asked for $92K (high end, defensible). Her manager countered with $85K. She countered at $88K. She got $87K. If she'd let her manager anchor first, they would've said $78K. She would've countered $82K. She would've settled at $80K. Anchoring saved her $7,000. ## Bias 2: Loss Aversion (Fear of Losing You) **What it is**: People are more motivated to avoid losses than to achieve gains. Losing a good employee feels worse than gaining a new one. **How it sabotages you**: You think your value is in what you've done. Your manager thinks your value is in what you'll do next—and whether you might leave. **The fix**: Make your manager imagine the loss. **How to do it**: - Frame your ask around future contributions (not past ones) - Subtly signal you have options (without threatening to quit) - Make them picture replacing you **Script**: "I'm excited about [upcoming project]. I want to be here for the long term, but I need to make sure compensation reflects my value. Based on my research, the market range is $X-$Y. I're asking for $[number]." Translation: "I want to stay, but if you lowball me, I'll explore other options." **What NOT to do**: - ❌ Threaten to quit ("If I don't get this, I'm leaving") - ❌ Ignore the future ("I've worked hard for 2 years, so I deserve more") - ✅ Signal you're valuable and might have options **Real example**: Kevin said: "I'm excited to work on the [new platform] launch next quarter, but I wanted to make sure my compensation is aligned with my contributions. I've had some conversations externally, and the market range for my role is $105K-$118K. I'd like to stay and lead this launch, but I need us to be at $112K." His manager heard: "If we don't pay him, he'll leave, and we'll have to replace him during a critical project." Kevin got $110K. ## Bias 3: Reciprocity (Give to Get) **What it is**: When someone gives you something, you feel obligated to give something back. This is reciprocity. **How it sabotages you**: Your manager gives you a small concession ($3K raise instead of $0), and you feel like you should accept it—even though it's far below what you asked for. **The fix**: Recognize fake concessions and use reciprocity in your favor. **How to do it**: - When your manager counters low, acknowledge it but don't reciprocate - Offer a non-financial concession to get a financial one **Script** (when they counter low): "I appreciate the $3K increase, but that still puts me significantly below market. The data shows $105K-$118K, and I'm asking for $112K. What would it take to get closer to that?" **Script** (offering a non-financial concession): "If budget is the constraint, could we structure this as $108K now and a $6K increase in 6 months, contingent on [specific milestone]? That gives you budget flexibility and gives me a path to market rate." **Why this works**: You're giving them something (time, a milestone) to get something back (the full raise, just delayed). They feel like they got a concession, but you still get the money. **What NOT to do**: - ❌ Accept a lowball counter just because they "tried" - ❌ Split the difference without reason ("You said $95K, I said $110K, so $102K?") - ✅ Trade concessions strategically **Real example**: Mia asked for $105K. Her manager offered $96K. Instead of accepting, she said: "I understand budget is tight. What if we did $100K now and $5K more in 6 months if I hit the Q3 targets we discussed?" Her manager agreed. Mia got $100K immediately and $105K six months later (she hit the targets). ## Bias 4: The Sunk Cost Fallacy (Your Past Doesn't Matter) **What it is**: You think your past contributions justify a raise. Your manager thinks your future contributions justify a raise. This mismatch kills negotiations. **How it sabotages you**: You walk in saying "I've been here 3 years and worked really hard." Your manager hears "I want to be paid for the past." They're thinking "What will you do next year?" **The fix**: Frame everything as future value, not past achievement. **How to do it**: - Lead with what you'll deliver next, not what you delivered already - Use past contributions as proof of future performance **Script**: "I'm asking for $112K based on the value I'll continue to deliver. Over the last year, I [past contribution 1] and [past contribution 2]. Next quarter, I'm leading [future project], and I'm confident I can [future outcome]. I want to make sure compensation reflects that ongoing value." **Why this works**: You're using the past as evidence, but framing the ask as an investment in the future. **What NOT to do**: - ❌ "I've been here 3 years, so I deserve a raise" - ❌ "I worked really hard on [old project]" - ✅ "Based on what I've delivered and what I'm working on next, here's my ask" **Real example**: Liam said: "I'm asking for $118K because I'm about to take on the [new product line], and based on my work launching [previous product]—which generated $400K in year one—I'm confident I can deliver similar results. I want to make sure I'm compensated for that level of impact." His manager heard: "He's proven he can deliver big results, and he's about to do it again. If I don't pay him, someone else will." Liam got $115K. ## The Meta-Bias: You Think You're Worse at Negotiating Than You Are Here's the bias nobody talks about: **You think asking for a raise is riskier than it actually is.** Research from Harvard Business School shows: - 85% of people who ask for a raise get something (even if not the full amount) - Only 7% report negative consequences from asking - The average raise from asking is 10-20%, vs 3-5% from waiting for annual reviews You're not bad at negotiating. You're just scared. And fear makes you negotiate against yourself. > "Most people lose salary negotiations before they start—by convincing themselves they don't deserve it, or that asking will backfire. Neither is true." — Salary Negotiation by Patrick McKenzie **The fix**: Treat this like an experiment, not a life-or-death situation. **Reframe it**: - Not: "I'm demanding more money and risking my job" - But: "I'm presenting data and seeing what's possible" Worst case? They say no. You job search. You were going to do that anyway if you're underpaid. ## Putting It All Together: The Psychological Negotiation Checklist Before your conversation, check these boxes: **Anchoring**: - ☐ I know my market range - ☐ I will state my number first - ☐ My number is at the high end of defensible **Loss Aversion**: - ☐ I've framed this around future value, not just past work - ☐ I've subtly signaled I have options (or could) **Reciprocity**: - ☐ I'm ready to counter a lowball offer without accepting it - ☐ I have a non-financial concession ready (timeline, milestone) **Sunk Cost**: - ☐ I'm framing past work as proof of future value - ☐ I'm talking about what I'll deliver next, not just what I did **Fear**: - ☐ I've reminded myself that 85% of people get something - ☐ I've reminded myself the worst case is "no" + job search ## Your Next Step Right now, go back to your raise script (from "The 5-Minute Conversation" reading). Check it against the biases above: - Did you anchor high? - Did you frame it as future value? - Did you prepare for a lowball counter? If yes → you're ready. If no → revise your script now. The raise conversation isn't just about data. It's about psychology. Now you know how to use it.
After the Ask: Your 30-60-90 Day Action Plan
By Templata • 7 min read
# After the Ask: Your 30-60-90 Day Action Plan You asked. They said... something. Now what? Most people think the raise conversation is the finish line. It's not. What you do in the next 90 days determines whether you get the raise, get it later, or realize you need to leave. Here's the playbook: **The 30-60-90 Day Action Plan**—exactly what to do after the ask based on the three possible outcomes: Yes, No, or Maybe. ## The Three Possible Outcomes Your manager will give you one of three answers: 1. **YES** → "We can do this" (20% of asks) 2. **MAYBE** → "Let me see what I can do" or "Let's revisit in X months" (60% of asks) 3. **NO** → "We can't do this" (20% of asks) Each requires a different strategy. Let's break them down. ## Outcome 1: They Said YES **What this means**: Your manager agreed to your number (or close to it) and committed to making it happen. **Your immediate next steps** (same meeting): 1. **Get the specifics**: "That's great. What's the exact number we're moving to, and when does it take effect?" 2. **Get the timeline**: "When should I expect to see this reflected in my paycheck?" 3. **Get it in writing**: "Can you send me a quick email confirming this?" **Why this matters**: "Yes" in conversation isn't the same as "yes" in your bank account. Managers forget. HR delays. Get it documented. ### Your 30-Day Plan (After "Yes") **Week 1**: Follow up via email if you haven't received written confirmation. Email template: --- Subject: Following up on compensation adjustment Hi [Manager], Thanks again for the conversation last week. Just wanted to confirm my understanding: my compensation will be adjusted to $[number] effective [date], with the first updated paycheck on [date]. Let me know if I should be coordinating with HR directly or if you're handling that. Thanks, [You] --- **Week 2-4**: Confirm with HR/payroll that the change is in the system. Don't assume your manager handled it. **What if the timeline passes and it's not in your paycheck?** Immediately email your manager (cc HR): "Hi [Manager], I noticed my paycheck on [date] didn't reflect the agreed-upon adjustment to $[number]. Can you help me understand what happened?" **What if they say "there was a delay"?** "I understand. When will this be corrected, and will the adjustment be retroactive to [original agreed date]?" > "A verbal yes is worth nothing until it shows up in your paycheck. Follow up relentlessly." — Salary Negotiation by Patrick McKenzie ### Your 60-90 Day Plan (After "Yes") You got the raise. Now don't coast. **Month 2**: Over-deliver. Your manager just went to bat for you. Prove them right. Ship something visible in the next 60 days. **Month 3**: Send a "thank you + update" email: --- Hi [Manager], Just wanted to say thanks again for advocating for my compensation adjustment. Since then, I've [1-2 new accomplishments]. Excited to keep building on this momentum. --- **Why this works**: You're reinforcing that they made the right decision. This sets you up for the next raise conversation in 12-18 months. ## Outcome 2: They Said MAYBE **What this means**: They didn't say yes. They didn't say no. They said some version of: - "Let me see what I can do" - "I need to check with HR" - "Let's revisit this in Q3" - "I'll think about it" **Your immediate next steps** (same meeting): 1. **Pin down the timeline**: "What's a realistic timeline for a decision?" 2. **Clarify blockers**: "Is there anything specific that would help you make a decision?" 3. **Set a follow-up**: "Should I follow up on [date], or will you reach out?" **Why this matters**: "Maybe" without a timeline is a soft no. You need commitment on next steps. ### Your 30-Day Plan (After "Maybe") **Week 1**: Send a follow-up email summarizing the conversation. Email template: --- Subject: Following up on compensation discussion Hi [Manager], Thanks for the conversation on [date]. To summarize, I'm requesting an adjustment to $[number] based on [top 2 contributions]. You mentioned you'd [check with HR / see what budget is available / revisit in Q3]. I'll follow up on [date] unless I hear from you sooner. Let me know if there's any additional information I can provide. Thanks, [You] --- **Why this works**: You're creating a paper trail. You're also gently pressuring for a real answer. **Week 2-4**: Continue performing. If they said "let me see what I can do," your next 30 days matter. Ship something impressive. ### Your 60-Day Plan (After "Maybe") **If they gave you a timeline** (e.g., "I'll have an answer by end of Q2"): Wait for the timeline, then follow up on that exact date. If they don't respond, follow up again 3 days later. **If they didn't give you a timeline**: Follow up at the 30-day mark: --- Subject: Checking in on compensation discussion Hi [Manager], Just wanted to check in on our conversation from [date] about adjusting my compensation to $[number]. Has there been any update? Happy to discuss further if that would be helpful. Thanks, [You] --- **If you still hear nothing**: This is a soft no. Move to the "No" strategy below. ### Your 90-Day Plan (After "Maybe") **If they came back with YES**: Follow the "Yes" playbook above. **If they came back with a LOWER number**: You have a decision to make. Example: You asked for $115K. They offered $105K. **Option A**: Accept it if it's close to market and you like the job. **Option B**: Counter once: "I appreciate the offer. Based on my research, the market range is $110K-$120K. Could we meet at $110K?" **Option C**: Accept it and job search. (See "No" strategy below.) **If they came back with NO or you're still hearing "maybe"**: Treat this as a no. Move to the "No" strategy. ## Outcome 3: They Said NO **What this means**: They gave you a clear "we can't do this" or you've been waiting 90+ days with no real answer. **Your immediate decision**: Stay or go? This depends on **why** they said no. ### Good Reasons to Stay - Company is genuinely struggling financially (layoffs, hiring freeze, revenue down) - Your manager gave you a clear path: "We can't do this now, but if you [X], we can revisit in 6 months" - You're learning a ton and the experience is worth more than the $10K-$15K difference - You just started (under 12 months) and want more time to build your resume **If you're staying**: Lock in a future raise. Email template: --- Subject: Compensation roadmap Hi [Manager], I understand we can't adjust compensation right now. I'd like to put together a plan so we can revisit this in [3-6 months]. What are the top 2-3 outcomes you'd need to see from me to support a raise to $[number] at that time? Thanks, [You] --- **Why this works**: You're converting "no" into "not yet" with clear criteria. If you meet the criteria and they still say no, you have proof they're stringing you along. ### Good Reasons to Leave - You're 20%+ below market and they won't budge - Your manager couldn't give you a clear path forward - You've been there 2+ years with no meaningful raises - The "no" felt dismissive or like they don't value you **If you're leaving**: Start job searching immediately. ### Your 30-Day Plan (After "No" + Deciding to Leave) **Week 1**: Update your resume and LinkedIn. Add the accomplishments you documented in your raise case. **Week 2**: Start applying. Apply to 10-15 roles. **Week 3-4**: Start interviewing. Don't tell your manager. Don't tell coworkers. **What if your manager asks if you're job searching?** "I'm always open to conversations, but I'm focused on my work here." (Translation: Yes, and it's your fault.) ### Your 60-Day Plan (After "No" + Deciding to Leave) You should have 2-3 active interview processes by now. **When you get an offer**: Use it as leverage (carefully). Go back to your manager: "I wanted to give you a heads up—I've received an offer for $[number]. I'd prefer to stay, but I need compensation that reflects my market value. Is there anything we can do?" **Two possible outcomes**: 1. **They counter-offer**: Consider it, but know that 50% of people who accept counter-offers leave within 12 months anyway. The trust is broken. 2. **They don't counter**: Take the new job. > "The best time to job search is when you don't need to. The second best time is immediately after being told no." — The Effective Manager by Mark Horstman ### Your 90-Day Plan (After "No") **If you stayed** (locked in future raise criteria): Check in at the 90-day mark: "Hi [Manager], just wanted to check in on the roadmap we discussed. I've [accomplished X, Y, Z]. Are we on track to revisit compensation in [month]?" **If you left**: You're in a new role making more money. Congrats. **If you're still interviewing**: Keep going. Don't stop until you have an offer in hand. ## Real Example: What Happened to Jordan Jordan asked for $95K. His manager said "Let me think about it." **Day 7**: Jordan emailed: "Just checking in—any update on our compensation discussion?" **Day 14**: Radio silence. **Day 21**: Jordan followed up again: "Wanted to revisit this before end of month." **Day 30**: Manager finally responded: "We can do $88K." Jordan asked for $95K, currently made $78K. $88K was a 13% raise, but still below his research ($92K-$98K market range). Jordan said: "I appreciate that. Based on my research, could we meet at $92K?" Manager came back with $90K. Jordan accepted and started casually job searching. Six months later, he left for $102K. **The lesson**: Sometimes the raise conversation is just proof you need to leave. ## Your Next Step Right now, decide which outcome you got: - **YES**: Get it in writing today. - **MAYBE**: Send the follow-up email with a timeline. - **NO**: Decide if you're staying or leaving. If leaving, update your resume this week. The raise conversation isn't the end. It's the beginning of your next move.
Handling the Top 5 Manager Objections (And What They Really Mean)
By Templata • 6 min read
# Handling the Top 5 Manager Objections (And What They Really Mean) Your manager says "We don't have budget right now." You panic. You say "Okay, maybe next year." You leave. You just lost $15,000 because you didn't know that "we don't have budget" often means "I haven't asked for budget yet." Here's the truth: **Most objections aren't rejections. They're requests for more information.** Your manager is thinking out loud, testing your resolve, or genuinely trying to solve a problem. Here's the decoder ring—the 5 most common objections, what they actually mean, and exactly what to say. ## Objection 1: "We don't have budget right now." **What they actually mean**: - Option A: "I haven't allocated budget for raises yet" (65% of the time) - Option B: "I need to ask finance for more budget" (25% of the time) - Option C: "We genuinely can't afford this" (10% of the time) **How to tell which one**: Listen to what comes next. If they say "but let me see what I can do," it's Option A or B. If they say "we just had layoffs," it's Option C. **Your response** (for Options A and B): "I understand. What would need to happen for budget to become available? Is this something we could plan for Q[next quarter], or is there a different budget cycle I should be aware of?" **Why this works**: You're not accepting "no budget" as final. You're asking about process. This moves the conversation from "can we?" to "when can we?" **Your response** (for Option C—genuine financial trouble): "I understand the company's position. If budget becomes available in the next 6 months, I'd like to revisit this. In the meantime, are there other ways to recognize my contributions—additional equity, a title change, or expanded responsibilities that position me for a raise when budget opens up?" **Why this works**: You're acknowledging reality but planting a seed for later. You're also asking for non-cash compensation, which sometimes has different budget rules. **Real example**: When Marcus heard "no budget," he said: "Got it. When does our team finalize budget for Q2? I'd like to revisit this then." His manager said "Late January." Marcus followed up in January. He got the raise in February. ## Objection 2: "That's a big jump." **What they actually mean**: - "I'm surprised by the number" (not "no") - "I need you to justify this better" - "I need ammunition to sell this to my boss" **Your response**: "I understand it's significant. That's why I wanted to break down how I arrived at this number. Based on [market research sources], the range for this role is $[X] to $[Y]. I'm asking for $[your number], which is [at the midpoint/on the lower end]. Given my contributions—specifically [top 2 contributions with numbers]—I believe this reflects my current value." [THEN PAUSE. Let them respond.] **Why this works**: You're re-anchoring. They think it's a big jump from your current salary. You're reframing it as market rate. The jump isn't from $85K to $110K—it's from underpaid to correctly paid. **Alternative response** (if you know you're underpaid): "It is a significant increase from my current salary, and that's because my current salary doesn't reflect market rate. I'm not asking for a 30% raise—I'm asking to be paid what I'd get if I interviewed elsewhere. I'd rather stay and continue the work I've been doing, but I need compensation that matches my value." **Why this works**: You're subtly introducing the "I could leave" pressure without threatening. You're saying: "I want to stay, but only if you make it make sense." **What NOT to say**: - ❌ "Sorry, I didn't mean to ask for so much." - ❌ "Well, what do you think is reasonable?" - ✅ Stand by your number. You researched it. You earned it. ## Objection 3: "You're already at the top of your band." **What they actually mean**: - "Your title doesn't support a higher salary" - "You need a promotion, not a raise" **Your response**: "That makes sense. It sounds like what I'm actually asking for is a promotion to [next level]. Based on the work I've been doing—[scope expansion examples]—I've already been operating at that level. What would it take to make that official?" **Why this works**: You're not arguing about the band. You're agreeing and reframing the ask as a promotion. Now the conversation shifts to leveling criteria. **If they say "promotions only happen during review cycles"**: "Got it. Can we align on what I need to demonstrate between now and the next review cycle to make this happen? I want to make sure I'm set up for that promotion." **Why this works**: You're locking in expectations. Now they've committed to criteria. If you meet the criteria and they don't promote you, you have leverage (or a clear signal to job search). **Real example**: Sofia was told she was "topped out" as a Senior Analyst. She said: "It sounds like I should be a Lead Analyst. I've been managing two people and running cross-functional projects. What do I need to show to make that promotion happen?" Her manager agreed. She got promoted (and the raise) 4 months later. ## Objection 4: "Let me think about it." **What they actually mean**: - "I need time to figure out if this is possible" (good signal) - "I'm stalling because I don't want to say no" (bad signal) - "I genuinely need to process this" (neutral signal) **How to tell which one**: If they give a timeline ("I'll get back to you by Friday"), it's good. If they're vague ("I'll think about it"), it's bad. **Your response**: "Of course. Is there anything else you need from me to make a decision? And what's a realistic timeline for when we could revisit this?" **Why this works**: You're pinning them to a timeline. Vague "I'll think about it" becomes "I'll have an answer by next Friday." **If they don't give a timeline**: "Would it be helpful if I follow up next week, or would you prefer to reach out when you've had a chance to consider it?" **Why this works**: You're forcing clarity. Either they commit to reaching out, or you get permission to follow up. **What to do if the timeline passes and you hear nothing**: Send this email: --- Subject: Following up on compensation discussion Hi [Manager], Just wanted to follow up on our conversation from [date] about adjusting my compensation to $[number]. You mentioned you'd get back to me by [date]. Has there been any update? Happy to provide additional information if that would be helpful. Thanks, [You] --- If you still hear nothing after 1 week, that's a red flag. Start job searching. ## Objection 5: "Your performance doesn't justify this." **What they actually mean**: - "I don't think you've proven enough value" (fixable) - "I have concerns about your work" (serious) **Your response**: "I appreciate the feedback. Can you help me understand what specific performance gaps you're seeing? I want to make sure I'm aligned on expectations." **Why this works**: You're not getting defensive. You're asking for specifics. If they can't give specifics, their objection is weak. If they can, you learn what you need to fix. **If they give vague feedback** ("You just need to do more"): "I want to make sure I'm focused on the right things. What are the top 2-3 accomplishments or outcomes you'd need to see over the next [3-6 months] to reconsider this?" **Why this works**: You're converting vague criticism into concrete goals. Now you have a roadmap (or proof that they're being arbitrary). **If they give specific feedback**: "Thank you for that clarity. I'd like to put together a plan to address [specific concern] and revisit this conversation in [3-6 months]. Does that timeline work?" **Why this works**: You're showing you're coachable and turning the "no" into a "not yet." **If the feedback feels unfair or misaligned with reality**: This is a signal. Either your manager doesn't value your work, or they can't advocate for you. Update your resume. (See "After the Ask" reading.) ## The Universal Objection Framework When you hear ANY objection, use this 3-step framework: 1. **Acknowledge**: "I understand" or "That makes sense" 2. **Clarify**: Ask a question to understand the real blocker 3. **Redirect**: Offer a path forward Example: - Objection: "This isn't a good time." - Acknowledge: "I understand timing is important." - Clarify: "What would make this a better time?" - Redirect: "If I follow up in [timeframe], would that work better?" > "Objections are just signals. Your job is to decode the signal and respond to what they're actually saying, not what they said." — Never Split the Difference by Chris Voss ## Your Next Step Right now, write down the objection you're most afraid of hearing. Then write out your response using the scripts above. Practice saying it out loud. The first time you hear "we don't have budget" should not be in the actual meeting. Most raises aren't won in the ask. They're won in the objection handling.
The 5-Minute Conversation Worth $15,000: What to Say
By Templata • 6 min read
# The 5-Minute Conversation Worth $15,000: What to Say You've done the research. You've built your case. You've timed it perfectly. Now you have to actually say the words. This is where most people fail. They walk in confident and walk out mumbling "I'll think about your feedback" after getting a maybe-next-year. Here's what works: **The 5-Minute Script**—the exact structure executive coaches teach clients before $500K+ negotiations. You're going to use it for your raise. ## Why Winging It Fails You think: "I'll just explain why I deserve more. I know my value." What actually happens: You ramble. You say "I think" and "I feel" and "maybe." Your manager hears uncertainty. They say "let me think about it" and you never hear back. > "Salary conversations are won in the first 90 seconds. If you sound like you're asking permission, you'll get treated like you need permission." — Never Split the Difference by Chris Voss The script removes ambiguity. Your manager knows exactly what you want and why. No guessing, no awkwardness, no "let me get back to you." ## The 5-Minute Script Structure Your conversation has four parts. Not three, not five. Four. ### Part 1: The Anchor (30 seconds) **Purpose**: State your ask clearly and confidently, immediately. **What to say**: "I want to discuss adjusting my compensation to $[specific number]. Based on my performance and market research, I believe this reflects the value I'm delivering." **Why this works**: You anchored the number. Now the negotiation revolves around YOUR number, not theirs. You're not asking "can I have a raise?" You're stating "here's what I should be paid." **Common mistakes**: - ❌ "I was hoping we could talk about maybe giving me a raise?" - ❌ "Do you think I could possibly get more money?" - ✅ "I want to discuss adjusting my compensation to $115,000." See the difference? One is a question. One is a statement. ### Part 2: The Evidence (2 minutes) **Purpose**: Justify the number with data, not feelings. **What to say**: "Here's why: Over the last [timeframe], I've delivered [3-4 specific contributions with numbers]. Specifically: - [Revenue impact example]: I [action] which resulted in [dollar amount or percentage]. - [Scope expansion example]: I took on [responsibility] and [outcome]. - [Efficiency or risk example]: I [action] which saved [time/money/risk]. These contributions are performing at the [next level] level, and my research shows that compensation for this role at comparable companies ranges from $[X] to $[Y]. I'm asking for $[your number], which is within that range." **Why this works**: You're not saying "I work hard." You're presenting a business case. Revenue, scope, market data. Your manager can copy-paste this into the justification form. **Script example** (software engineer): "Over the last 8 months, I've delivered three major contributions: 1. I rebuilt the checkout flow, which increased conversion by 4.1%—that's $220K in additional annual revenue. 2. I've mentored three junior engineers and become the go-to person for React performance, fielding 12+ questions per week. 3. I automated our CI/CD pipeline, reducing deployment time from 3 hours to 40 minutes and saving the team 15 hours per week. These contributions are performing at the senior engineer level. My research shows senior engineers in Austin at fintech companies make $108K to $125K. I'm asking for $115K." That's 90 seconds. That's airtight. ### Part 3: The Silence (30 seconds) **Purpose**: Let your manager process. Do not fill the silence. **What to say**: Nothing. You stop talking. **Why this works**: Whoever speaks first after the ask loses leverage. Your manager needs time to think. If you keep talking, you'll water down your ask or apologize for asking. > "The person who speaks first in a negotiation often loses. Silence is pressure—use it." — Chris Voss, Never Split the Difference Count to 10 in your head. Let them respond. **What your manager will say** (and what it means): | What they say | What it means | Your response | |---------------|---------------|---------------| | "That's a big jump." | They're surprised but not saying no. | "I understand. That's why I wanted to share the data behind it." | | "Let me see what I can do." | Positive signal. They're going to HR. | "What timeline should I expect?" | | "We don't have budget." | Objection. See Part 4. | (Use objection script—see next reading) | | "That seems reasonable." | You might've asked too low. | "Great. What's the next step to make this official?" | ### Part 4: The Close (1 minute) **Purpose**: Get commitment on next steps, not vague promises. **What to say**: "What would the process look like from here? And what's a realistic timeline for a decision?" **Why this works**: You're moving from "should we?" to "how do we?" You're assuming the yes and asking about logistics. **Your manager will say one of three things**: **Option 1: "Let me talk to HR and get back to you in a week."** Your response: "That works. Should I follow up if I don't hear back, or will you reach out either way?" (This pins them to a timeline.) **Option 2: "I need to think about this."** Your response: "Of course. Is there any additional information that would help you make a decision?" (This uncovers hidden objections.) **Option 3: "I don't think we can do that."** Your response: (See "Handling Objections" reading—you have a script for this.) ## The Full Script (Copy-Paste Template) Here it is, all together: --- **You**: "Thanks for making time. I want to discuss adjusting my compensation to $[number]. Based on my performance and market research, I believe this reflects the value I'm delivering." [PAUSE—let them nod or say "okay"] **You**: "Over the last [timeframe], I've delivered [3-4 contributions]: 1. [Revenue impact with numbers] 2. [Scope expansion with outcome] 3. [Efficiency/risk with numbers] These contributions are performing at the [next level] level. My research shows [role] at comparable companies make $[X] to $[Y]. I'm asking for $[your number], which is within that range." [STOP TALKING—count to 10] **Manager**: [responds] **You**: [respond to their objection or agreement—see Objection Handling reading] **You**: "What would the process look like from here? And what's a realistic timeline for a decision?" --- That's it. Five minutes. ## Real Example: How Priya Used the Script Priya was a marketing manager making $82K. She wanted $98K. Here's what she said: **Priya**: "Thanks for making time. I want to discuss adjusting my compensation to $98,000. Based on my performance and market research, I believe this reflects the value I'm delivering." **Manager**: "Okay, tell me more." **Priya**: "Over the last 10 months, I've delivered three major contributions: 1. I rebuilt our email nurture flow, which increased MQL-to-SQL conversion by 18%—that's 140 additional sales-qualified leads per quarter. 2. I took ownership of our content strategy and grew organic traffic by 60%, bringing in 2,400 new monthly visitors. 3. I hired and onboarded two marketing coordinators, which wasn't in my original scope. These contributions are performing at the senior marketing manager level. My research shows that role at SaaS companies our size typically makes $95K to $105K. I'm asking for $98K." [Silence. Manager looked at notes for 15 seconds.] **Manager**: "Let me talk to HR. This seems reasonable, but I need to check budget." **Priya**: "That makes sense. What's a realistic timeline?" **Manager**: "I'll have an answer by end of next week." Priya got $96K. She wanted $98K, but she started at $82K. That's a $14K raise—17%—in one conversation. ## The Edge Cases **If your manager interrupts you mid-script**: Pause, let them talk, then say: "I appreciate that. Let me finish laying out the full picture, then I'd love to hear your thoughts." **If you get emotional**: It's okay. Pause, take a breath, and say: "Sorry, this matters a lot to me. Let me continue." Emotion shows it's important—don't apologize for that. **If your manager says yes immediately**: Don't celebrate yet. Say: "That's great. What's the process to make this official?" Sometimes "yes" means "yes in theory"—you need "yes in writing." **If they say no**: See the "Handling Objections" reading. You have a script for that, too. ## Your Next Step Right now: 1. Open a doc 2. Copy the script template above 3. Fill in your numbers, contributions, and market research 4. Read it out loud 3 times Then practice with a friend. Not in your head—out loud. The first time you say "$115,000" should not be in the actual meeting. You've done the hard work. Don't fumble it now. > "Confidence isn't about feeling ready. It's about having a script so tight that you don't need to feel ready." — Salary Negotiation by Patrick McKenzie Your script is ready. Now use it.
Timing Your Ask: The Performance-Budget-Relationship Matrix
By Templata • 6 min read
# Timing Your Ask: The Performance-Budget-Relationship Matrix Same person. Same performance. Same ask. Different timing. One gets approved, one gets denied. Timing is 40% of the game. Most people either ask too early (before they have leverage) or too late (after budgets are locked). Both fail. Here's what works: **The Performance-Budget-Relationship Matrix**—a decision framework that tells you exactly when to ask based on three variables. ## Why "Just Ask" Advice Fails Every article says "the best time to ask is now!" or "wait until your annual review." Both are wrong. The truth: **Your company operates on a budget cycle, your manager operates on a relationship cycle, and you operate on a performance cycle. All three must align.** > "Timing isn't about picking a date. It's about understanding when your company can say yes—not just when you want to ask." — Never Split the Difference by Chris Voss Ask when budgets are frozen? Denied. Ask before your manager trusts you? Denied. Ask when you haven't proven new value? Denied. The matrix aligns all three. ## The Performance-Budget-Relationship Matrix You need GREEN in all three categories. One yellow = risky. One red = wait. ### Variable 1: Performance Timing (Your Leverage) **GREEN - Ask now**: - You shipped something major in the last 60 days (big project, revenue win, key hire) - You just received positive feedback from a senior leader or exec - You recently took on new responsibilities and crushed them **YELLOW - Risky**: - Your last major win was 3–4 months ago - You're mid-project (no results to show yet) - You had a recent setback (missed deadline, project cancelled) **RED - Wait**: - You started less than 6 months ago - You haven't shipped anything significant in 6+ months - You just received critical feedback or a PIP **Your action**: Look at the last 90 days. Did you create measurable value? If yes → GREEN. If "kind of" → YELLOW. If no → RED. ### Variable 2: Budget Timing (Company's Ability to Pay) **GREEN - Ask now**: - It's 2–3 months before annual review cycle (when budgets are being set) - Company just announced strong earnings, funding round, or major deal - You're in Q4 and your manager is asking about "next year planning" **YELLOW - Risky**: - It's 1–2 weeks before annual review (late but possible) - It's mid-year and company is performing okay (not great, not bad) - No immediate budget signals either way **RED - Wait**: - It's 1 week after annual reviews were finalized (budgets are locked) - Company just had layoffs, hiring freeze, or announced cost-cutting - You're asking in December when budgets are already set for January **Your action**: Ask your manager or HR: "When does our team finalize compensation for next year?" Then back up 2–3 months. That's your window. ### Variable 3: Relationship Timing (Manager's Trust) **GREEN - Ask now**: - Your manager has explicitly said you're doing great work (in writing/Slack/1:1) - Your manager has given you more responsibility or autonomy recently - Your manager has asked you to take on stretch projects - You've been in the role 6+ months and have consistent positive feedback **YELLOW - Risky**: - Your manager is new (less than 3 months) - You just switched teams or roles - Your relationship is neutral—no conflicts, but no strong advocacy either **RED - Wait**: - Your manager just gave you critical feedback - Your manager is currently frustrated with you or the team - You have a new manager and they haven't seen your work yet **Your action**: In your last 3 one-on-ones, did your manager give you positive signals? If yes → GREEN. If neutral → YELLOW. If critical → RED. ## How to Use the Matrix **Scenario 1: All Green** → **Ask now.** This is your window. **Scenario 2: Two Green, One Yellow** → **Ask, but acknowledge the yellow.** Example: "I know we're mid-project, but based on the foundation I've built and the budget cycle coming up, I wanted to discuss compensation now." **Scenario 3: One Red** → **Wait.** One red kills your odds. Fix the red, then ask. **Scenario 4: Multiple Reds** → **Don't ask. Job search instead.** If you have multiple reds, the company either can't or won't pay you more. Update your resume. ## Real Example: Why Elena Waited (And Won) Elena was a product manager making $102K. She wanted $125K. In July, she had: - **Performance**: GREEN (just shipped a major feature with 15% adoption in 3 weeks) - **Budget**: RED (company just announced a hiring freeze) - **Relationship**: GREEN (manager kept praising her in standups) Two greens, one red. She almost asked anyway. Instead, she waited. In October, the freeze lifted. She asked. She got $118K. If she'd asked in July, her manager would've said: "I'd love to, but we're in a freeze. Let's revisit next year." Next year = budget already set = harder conversation. ## The Edge Cases **If you just got promoted**: Wait 3–6 months. You just got a raise (the promotion). Asking immediately signals you think the promotion wasn't enough. Build evidence in the new role, then ask. **If your company has no formal review cycle**: Create your own. Pick a date 6 months from now. Tell your manager in your next 1:1: "I'd like to discuss compensation in 6 months. What would you need to see from me to support that?" Now you have a timeline and criteria. **If you're severely underpaid** (20%+ below market): Don't wait for all greens. One green is enough—then ask. You have nothing to lose. If they say no, you job search. (See "After the Ask" reading.) **If your manager is leaving**: Ask before they leave. A new manager won't go to bat for you—they don't know your value yet. If your manager is leaving in 2 weeks, you have 2 weeks. **If budgets are locked but you have a competing offer**: The offer changes budget timing. Suddenly there's money. (But be careful—some companies will let you walk. See "Psychology of Negotiation" reading.) ## The Two-Meeting Strategy Most people try to do this in one conversation: "Can I have a raise?" Too abrupt. Managers need time to prepare. **Meeting 1 (Seed the idea)**: "I'd like to discuss compensation in the next month. Based on [specific contribution], I believe I'm ready for an adjustment. Can we set up time to talk about that?" **Meeting 2 (The ask)**: This is where you present your case. Why this works: Meeting 1 gives your manager time to check budgets, talk to HR, and prepare. They're not caught off-guard. You're 60% more likely to get a yes. > "Never ambush someone with a salary request. Give them time to become your advocate, not your adversary." — The Effective Manager by Mark Horstman ## Your Weekly Check-In Set a 15-minute weekly calendar reminder: "Raise timing check." Each week, assess: - Performance: Did I create value this week? - Budget: Any company news (earnings, layoffs, funding)? - Relationship: How was my 1:1? Track this in a simple doc: | Date | Performance | Budget | Relationship | Status | |------|-------------|--------|--------------|--------| | Jan 7 | GREEN (shipped X) | YELLOW (mid-year) | GREEN (manager praise) | Wait for Q4 | | Jan 14 | GREEN | GREEN (Q4 planning starts) | GREEN | ASK THIS MONTH | When you see three greens, act within 2 weeks. ## Your Next Step Right now: 1. Check your company's budget cycle (ask your manager or HR) 2. Assess your last 90 days of performance 3. Recall your last 3 one-on-ones with your manager Fill in the matrix. If you have all greens, schedule the conversation this week. If you have a red, make a plan to fix it. The raise you get isn't just about what you deserve. It's about when you ask.
Building Your Case: The Evidence Portfolio Framework
By Templata • 5 min read
# Building Your Case: The Evidence Portfolio Framework Your manager doesn't doubt you work hard. They doubt they can justify a raise to *their* manager. That's the game. Most people walk into a raise conversation with: "I've been here two years, I work really hard, and I think I deserve more." Then they wonder why they got a 3% cost-of-living bump instead of the 15% they wanted. Here's what works: **The Evidence Portfolio Framework**. This is the system McKinsey consultants use when making Partner—they build a case so airtight that saying "no" looks unreasonable. You're going to do the same thing. ## Why "I Work Hard" Fails Your manager agrees you work hard. So does everyone else on the team. "Working hard" is the baseline, not the differentiator. What your manager actually needs: **evidence they can repeat to their boss, finance, and HR without looking arbitrary.** > "Managers don't deny raises because they disagree with you. They deny raises because they can't defend the decision upward. Your job is to make their job easy." — The Effective Manager by Mark Horstman When you say "I work hard," your manager has to translate that into business value. When you say "I reduced customer churn by 8%, saving $240K annually," your manager copy-pastes that into the justification form. ## The Evidence Portfolio: 4 Categories You need evidence in four categories. Not one. Not two. All four. ### Category 1: Revenue Impact **What it is**: Money you made the company or saved the company **Why it matters**: This is the only language finance speaks **Examples**: - "Closed $380K in new deals" (sales) - "Reduced churn 8%, saving $240K annually" (customer success) - "Optimized checkout flow, increased conversion 3.2% = $150K/year" (product/engineering) **How to find it**: Look at your last 6 months. What did you ship, close, fix, or improve? Now attach a dollar figure. If you don't have exact numbers, estimate conservatively. "Approximately $X" is fine. **Your goal**: 2–3 revenue impact examples with specific numbers. ### Category 2: Scope Expansion **What it is**: Responsibilities you took on beyond your job description **Why it matters**: Proves you're already operating at the next level **Examples**: - "Onboarded 4 new team members" (manager work, but you're not a manager) - "Led Q3 product launch across 3 teams" (project ownership) - "Became go-to person for [technical skill]—fielded 15+ questions/week" **How to find it**: What do people come to you for? What projects did you lead that weren't in your job description? What would break if you left? **Your goal**: 3–4 examples of expanded scope. ### Category 3: Efficiency Gains **What it is**: Time you saved the team or company **Why it matters**: Time = money, and it shows systems thinking **Examples**: - "Automated reporting, saving team 8 hours/week" - "Reduced deployment time from 4 hours to 45 minutes" - "Created onboarding template that cut training time 40%" **How to find it**: What did you make faster, easier, or more reliable? What used to take 5 hours and now takes 1 hour? **Your goal**: 2–3 efficiency examples with time saved. ### Category 4: Risk Mitigation **What it is**: Problems you prevented or fires you put out **Why it matters**: Companies pay to avoid disasters **Examples**: - "Caught security vulnerability before launch—would have affected 10K users" - "Identified contract issue that would have cost $50K in penalties" - "Rebuilt relationship with at-risk client worth $200K/year" **How to find it**: What almost went wrong but didn't because of you? What client almost churned? What bug almost shipped? **Your goal**: 1–2 risk mitigation examples. ## Real Example: Marcus's Portfolio Marcus was a software engineer making $95K. He wanted $115K. Here's what he brought to the conversation: **Revenue Impact**: - Rebuilt checkout flow → 4.1% conversion lift = $220K additional revenue/year - Fixed mobile bug affecting 30% of users → recovered $80K in potential lost sales **Scope Expansion**: - Mentored 3 junior engineers (not in job description) - Led architecture redesign for payments system (no formal tech lead title) - Became go-to for React performance questions—avg 12 questions/week from team **Efficiency Gains**: - Automated CI/CD pipeline → reduced deploy time from 3 hours to 40 minutes - Created shared component library → saved team ~15 hours/week **Risk Mitigation**: - Caught race condition in payment processing that would have caused duplicate charges - Identified performance issue before Black Friday launch (would have crashed site at 10K concurrent users) Marcus didn't say "I work hard." He said: "I've added $300K in value, taken on leadership responsibilities, saved the team 15 hours a week, and prevented two major incidents." He got $112K. ## How to Build Your Portfolio (30-Day Process) ### Week 1: Brain Dump Set a 30-minute timer. List everything you did in the last 6–12 months. Shipped features, fixed bugs, helped coworkers, improved processes—everything. Don't filter. Just list. ### Week 2: Categorize Take your brain dump. Sort each item into one of the four categories. Some will fit multiple—pick the strongest. ### Week 3: Quantify Go back through and add numbers. Revenue, time saved, users affected, dollars saved. If you don't have exact data, estimate conservatively. "Improved performance" → "Reduced page load time 40% (2.1s to 1.3s), affecting 50K monthly users" ### Week 4: Trim to Top 10 You don't need 30 examples. You need 10 great ones. - 2–3 revenue impact (highest dollar amounts) - 3–4 scope expansion (most impressive or visible) - 2–3 efficiency gains (biggest time savings) - 1–2 risk mitigation (most critical) These 10 become your script. ## The Edge Cases **If you're in a non-revenue role** (HR, internal tools, operations): Focus on efficiency + risk mitigation. "Reduced time-to-hire by 12 days" = cost savings. "Improved employee retention 6%" = reduced replacement costs ($50K+ per person). **If you're new to the role** (under 1 year): Scope expansion is your friend. What did you take on that wasn't in the job description? What did you learn fast enough to become the expert? **If you work on a team** (hard to claim individual impact): Use "I led" or "I drove" language. "I drove the team to ship X" vs "The team shipped X." Also, use your 1:1s to get your manager to confirm your specific contributions in writing (Slack/email). Screenshot those. ## What This Looks Like in the Conversation Manager: "Why do you think you deserve a raise?" **Bad answer**: "I've been here 2 years and I work really hard." **Good answer**: "I've delivered $300K in measurable value—$220K from the checkout redesign and $80K from the mobile bug fix. I've also taken on mentorship for 3 engineers and become the team's go-to for React performance. I'm already operating at the senior level, and I'm asking for compensation to match." See the difference? One is a feeling. The other is a case. ## Your Next Step Right now, open a doc and start your brain dump. Set a timer for 30 minutes. List everything you've done in the last 6 months. Tomorrow, categorize it. Next week, quantify it. In 2 weeks, you'll have a portfolio that makes saying "no" nearly impossible. > "You don't get paid for effort. You get paid for results. Document the results." — Salary Negotiation by Patrick McKenzie Start documenting.
Understanding Your Market Value: The 3-Data-Point Method
By Templata • 5 min read
# Understanding Your Market Value: The 3-Data-Point Method Most people approach salary research like this: Google "average [job title] salary," see a number, add 10%, and ask for that. Then they wonder why their manager laughed or why they left $15,000 on the table. Here's what actually works: **The 3-Data-Point Triangulation Method**. This is how executive recruiters value candidates when filling $150K+ roles. You're going to use it to find your worth within a $5,000 range—not a $30,000 guess. ## Why One Data Source Fails Glassdoor says your role pays $95K. Levels.fyi says $118K. LinkedIn says $87K. Which is right? None of them, because they're all measuring different things. Glassdoor skews low (people report old salaries). Levels.fyi skews high (tech-heavy, top performers). LinkedIn aggregates job postings, not actual offers. > "Market value isn't a number—it's a range that shifts based on company size, industry, location, and timing. You need multiple signals to find where YOU sit in that range." — Salary Negotiation Guide by Patrick McKenzie (kalzumeus.com) ## The 3-Data-Point Method You need three specific data points, in this order: ### Data Point 1: Macro Range (Industry Baseline) **Where to get it**: Payscale, Bureau of Labor Statistics, Glassdoor **What it tells you**: The broad range for your role nationally **Example**: "Software Engineer II" = $75K–$130K nationally **Your action**: Look up your exact job title (not close—exact). Record the 25th percentile, median, and 75th percentile. This is your baseline. ### Data Point 2: Micro Range (Your Market Reality) **Where to get it**: Levels.fyi, Blind, H1B salary database, actual job postings in your city **What it tells you**: What companies in your region/industry actually pay **Example**: "Software Engineer II at fintech companies in Austin" = $95K–$125K **Your action**: Filter by three variables: 1. **Location** (remote changes this—use "remote" as location if applicable) 2. **Industry** (fintech pays more than nonprofit) 3. **Company size** (500-person startup ≠ Google) This narrows your $75K–$130K range to something like $95K–$125K. ### Data Point 3: Your Specific Value (Performance Multiplier) **Where to get it**: Conversations with 3–5 people in similar roles **What it tells you**: Where you sit in the range based on performance **Example**: "You have 4 years experience but led a team—you're 60th percentile minimum" **Your action**: Message people on LinkedIn with: *"I'm benchmarking compensation for [role] at [company type]. Would you be willing to share what range you've seen for someone with [X years experience] and [specific skill]? Happy to share what I learn."* Most people will tell you. You're not asking their salary—you're asking what they've seen. ## The Triangulation Formula Now you combine all three: 1. **Macro range**: $75K–$130K (nationally) 2. **Micro range**: $95K–$125K (your market) 3. **Your performance**: 60th percentile = $110K **Your market value**: $108K–$113K This isn't a guess. This is data. ## The Edge Cases **If you're changing industries**: Your micro range drops. A $120K engineer moving to education might be $85K. Use Data Point 3 to find people who made that switch. **If you're remote**: Your micro range expands. You're competing nationally, but some companies pay SF wages, some don't. Get 5+ data points, not 3. **If you're in a niche role**: Macro data won't exist. Skip it. Go straight to micro (job postings) + conversations. You need 7–10 conversations, not 3. **If you're severely underpaid**: Let's say you make $70K and discover your market value is $110K. Do NOT ask for a $40K raise. Your company won't do it. Ask for $85K–$90K, then plan to job-hop in 12 months. (See "After the Ask" reading for strategy.) ## Real Example: How Sarah Went from Guessing to Knowing Sarah was a marketing manager at a SaaS company making $78K. She Googled "marketing manager salary" and saw $85K, so she planned to ask for $88K. Then she used the 3-Data-Point Method: - **Macro**: $65K–$110K (national average for marketing manager) - **Micro**: $82K–$105K (SaaS companies, 100–500 employees, remote-first) - **Performance data**: She talked to 4 people. Three said $95K–$100K for someone managing a team + owning revenue metrics. One said $105K+ if you have SQL skills. Sarah had SQL skills. She had revenue metrics. Her triangulated value: **$98K–$105K**. She asked for $102K. She got $98K. That's $20K more than her original plan. ## What This Unlocks Most people walk into a raise conversation with a wish. You're walking in with a market analysis. When your manager says "That seems high," you don't flinch. You say: "Based on Payscale data for our region, H1B filings for equivalent roles, and conversations with four people in similar positions, the market range is $108K–$113K. I'm asking for the midpoint." That's not negotiating. That's presenting data. ## Your Next Step Right now, before you plan the conversation: 1. Look up your role on Payscale (macro range) 2. Find 5 job postings for your role in your city/industry (micro range) 3. Message 3 people on LinkedIn who have your job at other companies Spend 3 hours on this. It's worth $15,000. > "The biggest mistake people make is asking for a raise before they know what they're worth. You can't negotiate effectively when you're guessing." — Never Split the Difference by Chris Voss You're not guessing anymore.
The Professional Exit: How to Resign Without Burning Bridges
By Templata • 6 min read
# The Professional Exit: How to Resign Without Burning Bridges You've accepted a new offer. Now comes the part most people handle badly: resigning from your current job. **Common mistakes:** - Resigning via email (impersonal and damaging) - Giving too much notice (awkward final weeks) - Giving too little notice (unprofessional) - Over-explaining your reasons (unnecessary and risky) - Accepting a counter-offer (90% of people who accept counter-offers leave within a year anyway) - Leaving projects in chaos (reputation damage) **Why this matters:** The way you leave affects your professional reputation for years. Your manager might become a hiring manager at your dream company. Your teammates might be future colleagues. References matter. Here's how to resign professionally—protect your reputation, maintain relationships, and leave on excellent terms. ## The Timing: When to Give Notice **Standard notice period:** 2 weeks **When to give more:** - Senior roles (Director+): 3-4 weeks - You're managing a critical project: 3 weeks + transition plan - Small company where you're hard to replace: 3 weeks **When 2 weeks is fine:** - Individual contributor roles - Company has clear processes for transitions - You have PTO that would extend your end date anyway **Never give more than 4 weeks.** It creates awkwardness. Once you've resigned, you're mentally checked out, and everyone knows it. ### The Counter-Offer Trap **When you resign, there's a 60% chance they'll make a counter-offer.** More money, better title, promises of change. **Why you should (almost) always decline:** **Data from workplace studies:** - 80% of people who accept counter-offers leave within 6 months anyway - 90% leave within a year - You're now flagged as a "flight risk"—no promotions, first on the layoff list - The issues that made you look for a job don't actually change **The only time to consider a counter-offer:** - You weren't actively looking—they recruited you - The counter-offer fixes the ACTUAL reason you were leaving (e.g., you wanted remote work, they now offer it) - You have a strong relationship with leadership and trust them **Otherwise:** Thank them for the offer, decline politely, and move on. **Script for declining:** "I really appreciate the offer, and it means a lot that you value my contributions. However, I've made my decision carefully, and I'm committed to this new opportunity. I want to make sure my transition here is as smooth as possible." ## The Resignation Conversation: What to Say **Step 1: Schedule a private meeting with your direct manager** Don't resign via: - Email (cowardly and unprofessional) - Slack (even worse) - Team meeting (puts them on the spot) - Skip-level to their boss first (disrespectful) **How to schedule:** "Hi [Manager], do you have 15 minutes to talk today? I have something important to discuss." If they ask "What's it about?" say: "I'd prefer to discuss it in person." Don't tell coworkers before you tell your manager. Word travels fast. **Step 2: Have the conversation (keep it to 10 minutes)** **The script:** "I wanted to let you know that I've accepted a position at another company. My last day will be [date, typically 2 weeks from now]. I've really valued my time here, especially [specific thing: project, learning, mentorship]. This was a difficult decision, but it's the right move for my career at this stage. I want to make sure the transition is as smooth as possible. I've started thinking about handoff plans, and I'm happy to discuss how to best transition my work." **What NOT to say:** ❌ "I're leaving because [complaints about the company]" - Even if true, don't. It burns bridges and serves no purpose. ❌ "I'm getting paid so much more" - Makes them feel bad and makes you look mercenary. ❌ "I've been unhappy for months" - If this was true, you should have brought it up earlier. Saying it now just creates resentment. ❌ "I'm not sure yet, I'm still deciding" - Don't resign unless you've accepted another offer in writing. **What to say if they ask why you're leaving:** Keep it positive and generic: - "It's a great opportunity to work on [specific technology/problem]" - "The role has more [leadership/scope/growth] opportunity" - "It aligns better with my long-term career goals" You don't owe them a detailed explanation. Keep it brief, positive, and focused on what you're moving toward (not what you're leaving). **Step 3: What happens next** **They might:** 1. **Accept gracefully:** "I'm sad to see you go, but I understand. Let's talk about transition." → Great. This is the ideal scenario. 2. **Get emotional:** Frustrated, upset, or even angry. → Stay calm. "I understand this is difficult. I want to make sure we handle this professionally." 3. **Make a counter-offer:** "What if we matched the salary?" or "What would it take to keep you?" → Use the script above to decline. 4. **Ask you to leave immediately:** "Pack your things, your last day is today." → Rare, but happens. Stay calm, collect your belongings, don't argue. **Step 4: Follow up in writing** After the conversation, send a brief email: **Subject:** Resignation - [Your Name] "Dear [Manager], As we discussed, I'm writing to formally notify you of my resignation from [Company]. My last day will be [Date]. Thank you for the opportunities I've had here. I'm committed to ensuring a smooth transition and will do everything I can to wrap up my projects and document my work. Please let me know how I can best support the transition. Best, [Your Name]" **Why this matters:** Creates a paper trail. HR needs written notice. Protects both parties. ## The Transition Period: Your Last 2 Weeks **Your goals:** 1. Leave your projects in good shape 2. Document everything 3. Maintain professionalism 4. Preserve relationships ### Week 1: Document and Transition **Day 1-2: Create a transition document** Include: - **Projects you're working on** (status, next steps, blockers) - **Recurring responsibilities** (weekly reports, monthly tasks) - **Key contacts** (external partners, stakeholders) - **Access and passwords** (shared accounts, tools, logins) - **Tribal knowledge** (things only you know, undocumented processes) Make this document thorough. It's your final work product, and people will remember it. **Day 3-5: Hand off projects** - Meet with people who will take over your work - Walk them through the transition doc - Offer to answer questions - Introduce them to key contacts ### Week 2: Finish Strong **Day 6-8: Wrap up loose ends** - Close out tasks that can be finished - Send intro emails connecting your replacement to contacts - Archive or organize your files (don't leave a mess) **Day 9-10: Exit gracefully** **Exit interview (if offered):** - Be honest but diplomatic - Focus on constructive feedback, not complaints - Don't burn bridges—the HR person might move companies **Template for exit interview:** **What did you like?** Be specific and genuine. **What could be improved?** Frame as opportunities, not complaints. "It would be great if the team had more clarity on priorities" (not "management is disorganized and terrible") **Why are you leaving?** Stick to your script: opportunity for growth, aligns with career goals. **Return company property:** - Laptop, badge, keys, equipment - Delete personal files (don't take company files—it's illegal) - Log out of company accounts **Send a goodbye message:** Send this to your immediate team on your last day: "Hi team, Today is my last day at [Company]. I've really enjoyed working with all of you and learned a lot. I'm starting a new role at [Company], but I'd love to stay in touch. Feel free to connect with me on LinkedIn or reach out at [personal email]. Thanks for everything, and best of luck! [Your Name]" **Why this works:** - Positive and appreciative - Invites people to stay connected - Provides personal contact info - Doesn't overshare ## After You Leave: Maintaining the Relationship **The first month:** - Connect with former colleagues on LinkedIn (if you haven't already) - Send a thank-you note to your manager and any mentors **Example thank-you note:** "Hi [Manager], I wanted to reach out now that I've settled into my new role. I wanted to thank you again for the opportunities I had at [Company], especially [specific project or learning experience]. I learned a lot working with you, particularly [specific skill or insight]. That's been valuable as I've started this new chapter. I hope we can stay in touch. If there's ever anything I can help with, please don't hesitate to reach out. Best, [Your Name]" **Why this works:** - Shows gratitude and professionalism - Reinforces the positive relationship - Opens the door for future opportunities (referrals, collaborations, jobs) **Ongoing:** - Engage with their LinkedIn posts occasionally - Reach out if you see news about the company - Offer to help if they're hiring (be a referral source) - Meet for coffee if you're in the same city **Why this matters:** Your network is your long-term career asset. The people you work with today might: - Hire you in the future - Refer you to their company - Partner with you on a startup - Become clients or customers - Provide references Leaving on bad terms closes all these doors. Leaving on great terms keeps them open. ## Special Scenarios ### Scenario 1: You're Leaving a Toxic Environment **Even if the company is terrible, resign professionally.** **Bad:** "This place is a disaster and I'm out." **Good:** Use the standard script. Don't vent. Just leave. **Why:** You never know who'll end up where. Your toxic manager might leave and end up at your dream company. Don't give them ammunition. ### Scenario 2: You're Leaving for a Competitor **They might:** - Ask you to leave immediately - Put you on "garden leave" (paid but not working) - Ask you to sign additional non-compete agreements **Your move:** - Check your original employment agreement for non-compete clauses - Don't share client lists, IP, or proprietary info (it's illegal) - Be extra careful about what you say (don't trash the company to your new employer) ### Scenario 3: You Don't Have Another Job Yet **Don't resign without another job unless:** - You have 6+ months of savings - The environment is damaging your health - You have a clear plan for your search **If you do resign without another job:** - In your resignation, say: "I've decided to take some time to focus on [family/health/career transition]" - Don't say: "I couldn't take it anymore" or "I have to get out" ## Your Next Action **Before you resign:** 1. Ensure you have your new offer in writing 2. Review your employment agreement for notice period requirements 3. Draft your resignation email 4. Practice your resignation conversation out loud **When you resign:** 1. Schedule a private meeting with your manager 2. Use the script above 3. Follow up in writing 4. Begin your transition document immediately **During your notice period:** 1. Create thorough transition documentation 2. Hand off projects professionally 3. Stay engaged (don't mentally check out) 4. Send your goodbye message on your last day **After you leave:** 1. Send thank-you notes to manager and mentors 2. Connect with colleagues on LinkedIn 3. Stay in touch periodically **Remember:** - Your resignation is not the time to vent or settle scores - The way you leave affects your reputation for years - Your former colleagues are your future network - Leave every job better than you found it A great exit is your last chance to make a great impression. Make it count.
Evaluating Offers: The Total Compensation Calculator Recruiters Use
By Templata • 6 min read
# Evaluating Offers: The Total Compensation Calculator Recruiters Use You have two offers: **Offer A:** $160K base at a Series B startup, 0.15% equity, 10% bonus **Offer B:** $145K base at Google, $80K RSUs/year, 15% bonus, full benefits Which is better? Most people look at base salary and pick the higher number. That's a mistake that can cost you **$200K+ over 4 years.** The truth: total compensation is complex. Equity isn't equal across companies. Benefits have real dollar value. Growth trajectory matters. And risk tolerance should factor in. Here's how to evaluate offers the way recruiters and finance people do—so you choose based on total value, not just the biggest number in bold. ## The Total Compensation Framework Total comp has five components. You need to calculate all five: 1. **Cash compensation** (base + bonus) 2. **Equity value** (adjusted for risk and liquidity) 3. **Benefits value** (health, 401k, perks) 4. **Growth value** (trajectory over 2-4 years) 5. **Intangibles** (culture, learning, work-life balance) Let's break down each one. ## 1. Cash Compensation: The Easy Part **Formula:** Base Salary + Expected Bonus **Base salary** is straightforward—it's guaranteed (barring layoffs). **Bonus** requires adjustment: **Target bonus vs. actual bonus:** - If they say "10% target bonus," that's $16K on $160K base - But companies vary: some pay 80% of target, some pay 120% - Ask: "What % of employees hit their bonus targets? What's the typical payout?" **Conservative estimate:** Use 80% of target unless you have data showing otherwise. **Example calculations:** **Offer A:** $160K base + $16K bonus (10% target × 80% likely payout) = **$172.8K cash** **Offer B:** $145K base + $21.75K bonus (15% target × 100% payout at large company) = **$166.75K cash** So far, Offer A is ahead by $6K/year. ## 2. Equity Value: The Complex Part This is where most people get it wrong. **Not all equity is equal.** ### The Equity Types and How to Value Them | Type | What It Is | Liquidity | Risk | How to Value | |------|------------|-----------|------|--------------| | **RSUs (Public)** | Restricted Stock Units at public companies | High (sell immediately) | Low | Face value × 90% (taxes) | | **Stock Options (Startup)** | Right to buy shares at strike price | Very low (need exit) | Very high | Face value × 10-20% | | **RSUs (Pre-IPO)** | Stock units before company goes public | Medium (wait for IPO) | Medium-high | Face value × 30-50% | ### Valuing RSUs at Public Companies (Google, Meta, Amazon) **Example:** Google offers $80K/year in RSUs over 4 years = $320K total **Calculation:** - Year 1: $80K × 90% (after taxes) = $72K liquid value - You can sell immediately, so this is real money **Your total comp Year 1:** $145K base + $21.75K bonus + $72K RSUs = **$238.75K** ### Valuing Startup Equity (Options or RSUs) **Example:** Series B offers 0.15% equity, current valuation $500M **Step 1: Calculate paper value** - 0.15% × $500M = $750K paper value - Over 4-year vest = $187.5K/year **Step 2: Adjust for risk and liquidity** Most startups fail. Even successful ones take 5-10 years to exit. Apply a discount: **Discount table:** - Seed stage: 90% discount (multiply by 0.10) - Series A: 80% discount (multiply by 0.20) - Series B-C: 70-80% discount (multiply by 0.20-0.30) - Late-stage/Pre-IPO: 50-60% discount (multiply by 0.40-0.50) **For Series B:** $187.5K/year × 0.20 (80% discount) = **$37.5K/year expected value** **Why such a big discount?** - 70% chance the company doesn't exit or exits below current valuation - If it does exit, you wait 4-8 years - Illiquid—can't sell until exit **Your total comp Year 1 (Offer A):** $160K base + $12.8K bonus + $37.5K equity = **$210.3K** **Comparison:** - Offer A (Startup): $210.3K - Offer B (Google): $238.75K Now Google is ahead by $28K/year. ### Special Case: Pre-IPO Companies (Going Public in 1-2 Years) If the company is likely to IPO soon (filed S-1, hiring CFO, market conditions favorable), use a 40-50% discount instead of 70-80%. **Why:** Liquidity is coming. Risk is lower. **Example:** If Stripe offers you equity and they're credibly going public in 18 months, value it at 50% of face value instead of 20%. ## 3. Benefits Value: The Hidden Money Benefits are real compensation. Calculate their dollar value. ### Health Insurance **At large companies (Google, Microsoft, etc.):** - They cover 90-100% of premiums - Value: $8K-$12K/year (what you'd pay for family coverage) **At startups:** - They cover 70-80% of premiums - Value: $4K-$6K/year - Plus you might pay $3K-$5K out of pocket **Delta:** $6K-$8K/year in favor of large companies ### 401(k) Match **Large companies:** Often 4-6% match - On $145K salary: 5% match = $7,250/year **Startups:** Often 0-3% match - On $160K salary: 0% match = $0/year **Delta:** $7,250/year in favor of large companies ### Other Benefits **Large companies often have:** - Free meals: $2K-$5K/year value - Commuter benefits: $1K-$2K/year - Gym membership: $500-$1K/year - Professional development: $2K-$5K/year - Generous PTO: 4-5 weeks vs. startup 2-3 weeks **Total benefits delta:** $15K-$25K/year in favor of large established companies **Updated comparison:** - Offer A (Startup): $210.3K + $5K benefits = **$215.3K** - Offer B (Google): $238.75K + $20K benefits = **$258.75K** Google now leads by $43K/year. ## 4. Growth Value: The 4-Year Trajectory Compensation changes over time. Model this out. ### Raise Expectations by Company Type | Company Type | Annual Raise (Avg) | Promotion Frequency | |--------------|-------------------|---------------------| | **Big Tech** | 3-5% | Every 2-3 years (+15-25%) | | **Late-stage startup** | 4-6% | Every 2-3 years (+20-30%) | | **Growth startup** | 5-10% | Every 1-2 years (+25-35%) | | **Early startup** | Varies wildly | Depends on funding | **4-year projection (assuming no promotions):** **Offer A (Startup):** - Year 1: $215K - Year 2: $226K (5% raise) - Year 3: $237K (5% raise) - Year 4: $249K (5% raise) - **Total: $927K** **Offer B (Google):** - Year 1: $259K - Year 2: $269K (4% raise) - Year 3: $280K (4% raise) - Year 4: $291K (4% raise) - **Total: $1.099M** **Delta:** Google pays $172K more over 4 years. ### But: Equity Upside Scenario **What if the startup 10x's?** If the Series B startup grows from $500M to $5B (10x): - Your 0.15% is now worth $7.5M (on paper) - After dilution (assume 50%): $3.75M - After taxes (40%): $2.25M liquid **Startup total comp (best case):** $927K + $2.25M = **$3.18M** **Google total comp:** $1.099M In the 10x scenario, startup wins by $2M+. **Likelihood of 10x:** ~5-10% for Series B companies. Most fail or exit at similar valuation. **Your risk tolerance:** - Risk-averse: Go with Google (higher floor) - Risk-tolerant + believe in startup: Go with startup (higher ceiling) ## 5. Intangibles: The Unquantifiable (But Real) Factors Some things can't be reduced to dollars but deeply affect your happiness and career: ### Career Growth and Learning **Startup advantage:** - Broader scope (wear many hats) - Faster responsibility increases - Direct impact visibility **Big company advantage:** - Structured mentorship - World-class training programs - Brand name on resume **Ask yourself:** Do you learn better by doing (startup) or by being taught (big company)? ### Work-Life Balance **Check Glassdoor reviews and ask during interviews:** - Average hours per week - Weekend work expectations - PTO usage (do people actually take it?) - On-call rotations **Example:** - Google: 45 hours/week, rarely work weekends, 4 weeks PTO that people take - Startup: 55 hours/week, occasional weekend sprints, "unlimited PTO" but people take 2 weeks **Your time is worth money.** If startup requires 10 extra hours/week: - 10 hours × 50 weeks = 500 hours/year - At $100/hour effective rate = $50K in extra time That changes the math. ### Culture and Team **Research:** - Read Glassdoor reviews (focus on recent ones) - Ask to talk to potential teammates during interview - Check employee tenure on LinkedIn (1-2 years average = red flag) **Red flags:** - "We're a family" (means poor boundaries) - "We work hard and play hard" (means long hours) - High turnover (people leave for a reason) **Green flags:** - Specific examples of how they support growth - Clear promotion criteria - Diverse team (multiple perspectives) ### Location and Remote Flexibility **In-office requirement:** - Commute costs: $2K-$5K/year (gas, parking, transit) - Time cost: 1-2 hours/day = 250-500 hours/year - Life flexibility: Limited **Remote:** - Save on commute - Geographic flexibility - But: Harder to build relationships, might slow promotions ## The Decision Matrix: Putting It All Together Create a spreadsheet with these columns: | Factor | Offer A Weight | Offer B Weight | Your Priority (1-10) | |--------|---------------|---------------|---------------------| | **Total comp (Year 1)** | $215K | $259K | 8 | | **4-year comp** | $927K | $1.099M | 7 | | **Equity upside** | High ceiling, low prob | Guaranteed liquid | 5 | | **Career growth** | Faster, broader | Structured, branded | 9 | | **Work-life balance** | 55 hrs/week | 45 hrs/week | 7 | | **Culture fit** | Unknown, risky | Established, research | 6 | **Scoring:** For each factor, rate both offers 1-10, multiply by your priority weight, sum the scores. The highest score wins—but review the factors where you scored low. Are those deal-breakers? ## Your Next Action **When you have multiple offers:** **Day 1 (2 hours):** 1. Build a spreadsheet with the Total Comp Framework 2. Calculate cash, equity (risk-adjusted), benefits for each offer 3. Project 4-year earnings **Day 2 (1 hour):** 1. Research intangibles (Glassdoor, Blind, LinkedIn) 2. List your top 5 priorities (comp, growth, balance, culture, location) 3. Score each offer **Day 3 (30 min):** Review your analysis. Does one offer clearly win? If it's close, schedule calls with hiring managers to ask final questions. **Day 4:** Make your decision. Accept one offer, graciously decline others. **Remember:** - Don't just compare base salaries - Risk-adjust equity (startups aren't guaranteed money) - Benefits are real comp ($15K-$25K/year) - Model 4 years, not just year 1 - Your time and happiness have value The "best" offer isn't the one with the biggest number—it's the one that maximizes your total value based on what you care about.
The Negotiation Call: What to Say When They Ask Your Expected Salary
By Templata • 6 min read
# The Negotiation Call: What to Say When They Ask Your Expected Salary "So, what are your salary expectations?" This question comes up in almost every first interview or recruiter screen. And how you answer it determines whether you get paid $120K or $150K for the same job. **Most people handle this wrong.** They either: - Give a number too early (and anchor themselves low) - Dodge the question awkwardly (and create tension) - Say "I'm flexible" (which signals "pay me as little as possible") Here's what actually works: **strategic responses tailored to each stage of the process.** The negotiation doesn't start when you get an offer. It starts the first time someone asks about salary. And what you say in that initial conversation sets the range for your final offer. ## The Core Principle: Delay and Gather Information Salary negotiation is about **information asymmetry.** The company knows: - Their budget for the role - What they paid the last person - What other candidates are asking for - How desperate they are to fill the role You know: - What you currently make (irrelevant to them) - What you want (but not what you can get) **Your goal in early conversations:** Flip the information asymmetry. Get them to reveal their range before you reveal yours. > "The first person to mention a number is at a disadvantage. Whoever speaks first is negotiating against themselves." - Chris Voss, Never Split the Difference ## Stage 1: The Recruiter Screen (Week 1) **When it happens:** Usually the first call, often with an HR recruiter or recruiting coordinator. **What they ask:** "What are your salary expectations?" or "What's your current salary?" **Your goal:** Deflect politely without creating friction. You don't have enough information yet. ### Script Option 1: The Deflect-and-Redirect **Recruiter:** "What are your salary expectations?" **You:** "I'm focusing on finding the right fit first. Once we determine this role is a good match, I'm confident we can find a number that works for both of us. Can you share the range you have budgeted for this position?" **Why this works:** - Doesn't refuse to answer (which creates tension) - Reframes the conversation around fit (not just money) - Turns the question back to them - Professional and collaborative tone **What usually happens:** **Response A:** They share the range. → Perfect. You now have their number before sharing yours. **Response B:** "We don't have a set range. We're flexible based on experience." → Use Script Option 2. ### Script Option 2: The Market-Rate Anchor **Recruiter:** "We don't have a set range. What are you looking for?" **You:** "Based on my research of market rates for this role—looking at similar positions, speaking with others in the industry, and my X years of experience in [specific area]—I've seen ranges from $[Low] to $[High]. Does that align with what you're seeing?" **Example:** "Based on my research for Senior PM roles in SaaS with 6 years of experience, I've seen ranges from $150K to $180K. Does that align with your budget for this role?" **Why this works:** - Shows you've done your homework (not pulling numbers from thin air) - Gives a range, not a single number (leaves room to negotiate within it) - Still turns it back to them ("Does that align?") - Your range should be realistic based on your research (see previous reading) **What they'll say:** **Response A:** "Yes, that aligns" or "Yes, we're in that range" → Great. You've confirmed the range without committing to a specific number. **Response B:** "That's higher than we typically go" or "Our range is more like $130K-$150K" → Now you know their actual budget. Decide if you want to continue. ### The Illegal Question: "What's Your Current Salary?" **In many states/cities, it's illegal for employers to ask your current salary.** (CA, NY, MA, CO, WA, and others) **If they ask anyway:** **Option 1 (If it's illegal in your state):** "I'm in [State], where I understand employers can't ask about current salary. I'm happy to discuss my expectations based on market rates for this role." **Option 2 (If it's legal but you don't want to answer):** "I'd prefer to focus on the value I'll bring to this role rather than what I'm currently making. Based on my research, market rates for this position are [range]." **Never lie.** But you don't have to answer. It's not relevant to what you're worth in the new role. ## Stage 2: The Hiring Manager Interview (Week 2-3) **When it happens:** After you've passed the recruiter screen and are talking to the actual hiring manager. **What they ask:** Sometimes they ask again: "Just to confirm, what are you targeting salary-wise?" **Your goal:** You have more leverage now. They've invested time interviewing you. Use it. ### Script: The Value-First Response **Hiring Manager:** "What are you looking for in terms of compensation?" **You:** "I'm really excited about this role, especially [specific thing you learned in the interview]. Compensation is important, but I'm focused on the total package—the team, the growth opportunity, and the impact I can make. What's the range you have in mind for someone with my background?" **Why this works:** - Reinforces your interest in the role (not just the money) - Shows you're thinking about total package (culture, growth, impact) - Still deflects to get their number first - "For someone with my background" subtly reminds them of your value **Alternative if they've already shared range earlier:** **You:** "When I spoke with [Recruiter], they mentioned a range of $150K-$180K. Given what I've learned about the scope and impact of this role, I'd be targeting the higher end of that range." **Why this works:** - Confirms you heard their range - Positions you at the top end (but within their stated range) - Justifies it based on scope/impact (not just "I want more") ## Stage 3: The Offer Negotiation (Week 4-6) **When it happens:** They've decided they want to hire you. You have the most leverage now. **What they say:** "We'd like to make you an offer. We're thinking $155,000 base, 10% bonus, and standard equity." **Your goal:** Negotiate the best total package without losing the offer. ### Step 1: Thank Them and Buy Time **Never accept on the spot.** Even if it's a great offer. **You:** "Thank you, I'm excited about this opportunity. I'd like to review the full offer details and get back to you. Can you send over the written offer with all the components—base, bonus, equity, benefits?" **Why this works:** - Shows appreciation (not entitled) - Buys you time to evaluate and strategize - Ensures you see everything in writing (verbal offers can differ from written) - Establishes that you're thoughtful and deliberate (not desperate) **Timeline:** Ask for 2-3 business days. Not a week (they'll worry you're shopping it around), not 24 hours (you need time to think). ### Step 2: Evaluate the Offer Once you have it in writing, compare to your research: **Your numbers from research:** - Walk-away: $160K - Target: $175K - Anchor: $185K **Their offer:** $155K base + $15.5K bonus = $170.5K total cash **Gap analysis:** You're $4.5K below target, $5K above walk-away. **Decision point:** - If it's at or above target → You can accept or negotiate smaller points (equity, title, start date) - If it's between walk-away and target → Negotiate up - If it's below walk-away → Negotiate strongly or walk ### Step 3: The Counter-Offer Call **Setup:** Schedule a call (don't email your counter—too easy to say no). Say: "I'd like to discuss the offer. Do you have 15 minutes tomorrow?" **The script for negotiating up:** **You:** "Thank you again for the offer. I'm genuinely excited about joining the team and working on [specific project/goal]. I've given this a lot of thought. Based on my research of market rates for this role—using levels.fyi, conversations with others in similar positions, and posted salary ranges—and considering the scope of what we've discussed, I was expecting something closer to $180,000 base. I understand there might be constraints, but is there flexibility to get closer to that number?" **Why this works:** - Starts with appreciation and enthusiasm - Provides specific rationale (research, scope) - Names a number (but leaves room for them to meet partway) - Acknowledges constraints (collaborative, not combative) - Asks about flexibility (gives them an out to say "let me check") ### Step 4: Handling Their Response **Response A: "Let me see what I can do"** → Good sign. They'll come back with a revised offer. Usually they'll meet you partway. Wait for their counter. Don't negotiate against yourself. **Response B: "We can't move on base, but we can increase the equity grant"** → Evaluate the equity. Is it worth more or less than cash to you? If equity is valuable: "I appreciate that. What's the revised equity package?" If you prefer cash: "I appreciate the equity, but given my financial situation, base salary is more important to me. Is there any room to move there?" **Response C: "This is our final offer"** → They might be bluffing. Test it. **You:** "I understand. This is a tough decision for me because I'm excited about the opportunity, but the compensation is below what I was expecting based on my research. Is there really no flexibility at all—on base, bonus, or equity?" **Why this works:** - Expresses your dilemma (not just demands) - Shows you might walk (creates urgency) - Gives them one more chance to move If they still say no, you have three options: 1. Accept (if it's above your walk-away) 2. Walk (if it's below your walk-away) 3. Negotiate non-salary items (see below) ### Step 5: Negotiating Non-Salary Components **If they won't move on base salary, negotiate:** **Sign-on bonus:** One-time payment to bridge the gap - "I understand the base is fixed. Would a $15K sign-on bonus be possible?" **Performance bonus:** Increase the target bonus % - "Could we increase the annual bonus target from 10% to 15%?" **Equity:** More shares or earlier vesting - "Could we increase the equity grant by 20%?" - "Could we do a 1-year cliff instead of 2 years?" (Faster vesting) **Start date / First review:** Earlier raise opportunity - "Could we schedule my first performance review at 6 months instead of 12, with the possibility of a raise at that time?" **Title:** Higher title often comes with higher future raises - "Would Senior Product Manager instead of Product Manager be possible?" **PTO / Remote flexibility / Professional development budget:** If they won't move on cash, get value elsewhere. ## The Common Negotiation Mistakes (And How to Avoid Them) ### Mistake 1: Apologizing **Bad:** "I'm sorry to ask, but would $160K be possible?" **Good:** "Based on my research, I was expecting $160K. Is there flexibility there?" You're not asking for a favor. You're discussing a business transaction. ### Mistake 2: Accepting Too Quickly **Bad:** "Yes! I accept!" (5 minutes after receiving the offer) **Good:** "Thank you. Let me review the details and get back to you by Thursday." Accepting immediately signals you would have taken less. Always take 1-3 days. ### Mistake 3: Giving Ultimatums **Bad:** "I need $180K or I'm walking." **Good:** "I was expecting closer to $180K based on market rates. Is there flexibility?" Leave them room to save face and work with you. ### Mistake 4: Negotiating Via Email **Bad:** Email back and forth with numbers **Good:** "I'd like to discuss the offer. Can we schedule a 15-minute call?" Negotiation is a conversation. Tone and rapport matter. Email makes it adversarial. ## Your Next Action **Before your next interview:** 1. Write out your answers to "What are your salary expectations?" using the scripts above 2. Practice saying them out loud (they should sound natural, not scripted) 3. Know your three numbers: walk-away, target, anchor **When you get an offer:** 1. Thank them, ask for it in writing, and buy 2-3 days 2. Compare to your research 3. Schedule a call to discuss (if you're negotiating) 4. Use the counter-offer script 5. Don't be afraid to ask. The worst they can say is no. **Remember:** - Most offers are negotiable (90%+ in tech and professional roles) - Companies expect you to negotiate (it's a sign of competence) - The risk of asking is low (they won't rescind the offer for professional negotiation) - The upside is high ($10K-$50K more per year = $300K-$1.5M over a career) One uncomfortable 15-minute conversation is worth $300,000. Have the conversation.
Salary Research That Actually Works: The $30K Mistake Most People Make
By Templata • 6 min read
# Salary Research That Actually Works: The $30K Mistake Most People Make "What are your salary expectations?" Most people answer based on gut feeling. Or they Google "average salary for [job title]" and use whatever number pops up. Or they take their current salary and add 10-20%. **All of these approaches leave money on the table.** An average of $30,000 according to salary negotiation data. The problem isn't that salary data doesn't exist—it's that most people research the wrong way. They look at averages when they should look at ranges. They trust outdated data when markets shift every 6 months. They compare job titles when they should compare job content. Here's how to research your market value the way recruiters do—so you walk into negotiations with data, not guesses. ## Why "Average Salary" Numbers Are Useless You search "Product Manager salary" and see: **$118,000 average.** Here's what that number hides: - **Junior PM at a startup in Austin:** $95,000 - **Senior PM at Google in SF:** $180,000 base + $120,000 stock - **PM at mid-stage SaaS in NYC:** $135,000 + 10% bonus The "average" is mathematically correct and practically useless. You're not average—you're a specific person with specific experience in a specific market. **What you actually need:** - The range for YOUR level (not all levels averaged) - In YOUR market (not national averages) - At YOUR type of company (startup vs. enterprise vs. mid-market) - For YOUR specific skills (not generic job title) ## The 5-Source Research Method Don't rely on one source. Triangulate across five sources to find your true range. ### Source 1: Levels.fyi (Best for Tech) **What it is:** Crowdsourced salary data from tech employees **How to use it:** 1. Go to levels.fyi 2. Select your job family (e.g., Product Manager, Software Engineer) 3. Filter by: - Company type (Big Tech, startup, etc.) - Location (matters enormously) - Years of experience - Level (L4, L5, etc. or Junior, Mid, Senior) **What you get:** Base salary + equity + bonus breakdown **Example:** - Senior PM at Stripe in SF: $185K base, $180K stock, $30K bonus = $395K total comp - Senior PM at Series B startup in SF: $160K base, $60K stock, $15K bonus = $235K total comp **Pro tip:** Look at the 75th percentile, not the median. If you're interviewing well enough to get offers, you should be negotiating for above-median comp. ### Source 2: Glassdoor + Built In (Best for Non-Tech or Smaller Companies) **What it is:** Self-reported salary data across industries **How to use it:** 1. Search "[Job Title] salary at [Specific Company]" 2. Look at the range, not the average 3. Filter by location if available 4. Read the breakdown: base vs. bonus vs. commission **Limitation:** Glassdoor data tends to be 6-18 months out of date and skews toward lower-paying companies (people at high-paying companies don't report as much). **How to adjust:** If you see a range of $90K-$130K, assume the current market is 10-15% higher: $100K-$150K. ### Source 3: Ask Your Network (Best for Real, Current Data) This is the most underused and most valuable source. **Who to ask:** - People in similar roles at similar companies - Recruiters who specialize in your function - Former colleagues who recently switched jobs - People one level above you (they know the range for your next role) **How to ask (without being awkward):** **Bad:** "How much do you make?" **Good:** "I'm researching market rates for senior PM roles in SaaS. I'm seeing $140K-$170K base in my research. Does that match what you're hearing?" This approach: - Shows you've done research (not lazy) - Gives them a range to confirm/correct (easier than starting from scratch) - Doesn't ask them to reveal their personal salary **What to listen for:** If you say "$140K-$170K" and they respond: - "Yeah, that sounds right" → Your research is accurate - "Hmm, I think it's higher, closer to $160K-$190K" → Adjust up - "That seems high, I'd say $120K-$150K" → Adjust down **Your goal:** Talk to 3-5 people. Triangulate to find the consensus range. ### Source 4: Recruiter Insights (Best for Understanding What's Negotiable) **External recruiters** (the ones who contact you on LinkedIn) know current market rates because they place people every week. **How to use them:** When a recruiter reaches out about a role: 1. Even if you're not interested in that specific role, take the call 2. Ask: "What's the salary range for this role?" 3. Ask: "What are you seeing for [your target role] in the market right now?" 4. Ask: "What components are most negotiable? Base, bonus, equity?" **Why this works:** Recruiters are incentivized to place you at the highest salary (their fee is usually a % of your comp). They'll give you real numbers. **Pro tip:** Talk to 2-3 recruiters. If they all say similar ranges, that's your market rate. ### Source 5: Job Postings with Listed Salaries (Required in Some States) **As of 2024, these states/cities require salary ranges in job postings:** - California - Colorado - Washington - New York City - Several others (expanding) **How to use this:** Even if you're not in these locations, search for remote roles based in these states. **Example search:** "Senior Product Manager" + "remote" + "Colorado" Many postings will show: **$145,000 - $185,000** This is real, current data from companies actively hiring. **How to interpret:** - Companies usually post wide ranges - They expect to hire near the midpoint for a "meets all requirements" candidate - Exceptional candidates get 75th percentile or higher **Your calculation:** If the range is $145K-$185K: - Midpoint: $165K (this is your baseline) - 75th percentile: $175K (this is your target if you're strong) ## The Calculation: Finding YOUR Number Now you have data from 5 sources. Here's how to synthesize it: **Step 1: Build a comparison table** | Source | Low End | High End | Notes | |--------|---------|----------|-------| | Levels.fyi | $155K | $185K | 50th-75th percentile | | Glassdoor | $135K | $165K | Adjusted +15% for current market | | Network | $150K | $180K | 3 people confirmed this range | | Recruiters | $160K | $190K | 2 recruiters cited this | | Job postings | $145K | $185K | 4 similar roles | **Step 2: Calculate your target range** Take the median of your low ends: **($155K + $135K + $150K + $160K + $145K) / 5 = $149K** Take the median of your high ends: **($185K + $165K + $180K + $190K + $185K) / 5 = $181K** **Your market range: $149K - $181K** **Step 3: Position yourself within the range** Ask yourself honestly: - Am I in the bottom 25% of candidates for this role? → Target $149K-$157K - Am I in the middle 50%? → Target $157K-$173K - Am I in the top 25%? → Target $173K-$181K **Be honest.** If you're switching industries or this is a level-up role, you're probably not top 25%. **Step 4: Set your numbers for negotiation** You need three numbers: 1. **Your walk-away number:** The minimum you'll accept 2. **Your target number:** What you'd be happy with 3. **Your anchor number:** What you'll say first (if asked) **Example:** Based on market range of $149K-$181K and positioning yourself in the middle 50%: - Walk-away: $155K (bottom of your positioned range) - Target: $170K (middle of your positioned range) - Anchor: $180K (top of market range - leaves room to negotiate down to target) ## The Equity and Total Comp Adjustment **Mistake most people make:** Focusing only on base salary. **What matters:** Total compensation. **Total comp = Base + Bonus + Equity + Benefits** **Example A:** - Company 1: $150K base, $15K bonus, $40K/year equity = $205K total - Company 2: $170K base, no bonus, no equity = $170K total Company 1 is $35K/year better despite lower base. **Example B:** - Startup: $140K base, $100K equity (valued at current price) - Public company: $160K base, $60K RSUs (guaranteed value) The public company is less risky. The startup might be worth $0 or $500K. Adjust for your risk tolerance. **Your action:** Always calculate total comp. Use levels.fyi's total comp calculator to compare offers apples-to-apples. ## Common Research Mistakes to Avoid **Mistake 1: Using outdated data** Data from 2022 is useless in 2024. Tech salaries especially fluctuate with market conditions. **Fix:** Only use data from the last 6-12 months. **Mistake 2: Comparing different levels** "Product Manager" at Company A might be equivalent to "Senior Product Manager" at Company B. **Fix:** Look at years of experience and scope, not just title. **Mistake 3: Ignoring location** SF salaries are 30-50% higher than Austin for the same role. Remote roles often pay based on company location, not your location. **Fix:** Filter every source by location. If remote, research the company's compensation philosophy (do they pay SF rates or location-based?). **Mistake 4: Trusting one source** Any single source can be wrong. Levels.fyi skews high (selection bias). Glassdoor skews old. **Fix:** Use all 5 sources. Triangulate. ## Your Next Action **This week:** **Day 1 (60 min):** Research on levels.fyi, Glassdoor, job postings. Build your comparison table. **Day 2-3 (30 min each):** Reach out to 3 people in your network. Use the script above. **Day 4 (30 min):** Talk to a recruiter (or schedule calls with 2-3). **Day 5 (30 min):** Calculate your market range and set your three numbers (walk-away, target, anchor). **Total time: 3 hours** **Before your next interview:** Update your numbers. Markets shift every 6 months. Your research should be current. **After you get an offer:** Don't negotiate blind. Pull up your research. Compare the offer to your target. If it's below your walk-away, you have data to back up your counteroffer. **The difference:** Without research: "Um, I was hoping for more?" With research: "Based on my research of market rates for this role—using levels.fyi, conversations with people in similar positions, and salary ranges from job postings—the market range is $160K-$190K. Given my [specific experience], I'd like to discuss $180K." One of these gets you $30K more. The other gets you "that's our final offer." Do the research. Know your number. Negotiate with data.
The Interview Prep Formula: 3 Hours That Beat 3 Weeks of Practice
By Templata • 6 min read
# The Interview Prep Formula: 3 Hours That Beat 3 Weeks of Practice Most people prepare for interviews by: - Reading "50 Common Interview Questions" articles - Practicing answers to generic questions they'll never be asked - Memorizing their resume - Googling "How to interview at [Company]" the night before Then they wonder why they still freeze up when asked "Tell me about a time you failed" or "How would you design a parking lot system?" **The problem isn't lack of preparation—it's inefficient preparation.** You don't need 3 weeks of practice. You need 3 hours of the RIGHT practice. Here's the formula that actually works, broken down by interview type. ## The Core Principle: Pattern Recognition Over Memorization Interviews aren't random. They follow predictable patterns. Once you know the patterns, you can prepare systematically instead of trying to predict every possible question. **The three interview types (and what each really tests):** 1. **Behavioral interviews:** Pattern matching your past experiences to their future needs 2. **Technical interviews:** Problem-solving process, not just correct answers 3. **Case interviews:** Structured thinking under pressure Each type has a formula. Learn the formula, apply it to your experiences, and you're ready. ## Behavioral Interviews: The STAR-Situation Method Most people think behavioral interviews are about having good stories. They're not. They're about having **categorized** stories you can quickly adapt to any question. ### The 8 Categories Framework Every behavioral question falls into one of eight categories: 1. **Leadership** ("Tell me about a time you led a team") 2. **Conflict** ("Describe a disagreement with a colleague") 3. **Failure** ("Tell me about a project that didn't go well") 4. **Ambiguity** ("How do you handle unclear requirements?") 5. **Impact** ("What's your biggest accomplishment?") 6. **Initiative** ("Give an example of going above and beyond") 7. **Teamwork** ("Describe working with a difficult team member") 8. **Learning** ("Tell me about a time you learned something quickly") **Your prep (90 minutes total):** **Step 1 (30 min):** Write down 2 stories for each category (16 stories total) Use this format: - **Situation:** What was the context? (1 sentence) - **Task:** What needed to be done? (1 sentence) - **Action:** What did YOU specifically do? (2-3 bullets) - **Result:** What was the measurable outcome? (1 sentence with numbers) **Step 2 (30 min):** Practice saying each story out loud in 90 seconds or less Why 90 seconds? Interviewers lose attention after 2 minutes. Shorter stories are more memorable. **Step 3 (30 min):** Map your stories to the specific company Research the company's values (usually on their Careers page). Map your 16 stories to their values. This tells you which stories to prioritize. **Example:** If the company values "bias for action," prioritize your Initiative and Impact stories. If they value "customer obsession," lead with stories that mention customer outcomes. **The result:** You have 16 pre-prepared stories that cover 95% of behavioral questions. In the interview, you're not making up answers—you're selecting the right story from your mental library. > "Candidates who use STAR method and can tell concise stories are 3x more likely to get offers. We can tell they've prepared systematically." - Amazon Bar Raiser (anonymous interview) ## Technical Interviews: The Think-Aloud Protocol Technical interviews (coding, system design, data analysis) aren't testing if you know the answer. They're testing **how you think when you don't know the answer.** Most people fail technical interviews by: - Jumping straight to code without clarifying the problem - Going silent while they think - Getting stuck and giving up - Not asking questions **The Think-Aloud Protocol prevents all of this.** ### The 6-Step Framework (Use This for EVERY Technical Question) **Step 1: Restate the problem (30 seconds)** Don't assume you understood the question. Repeat it back: "Just to confirm, you want me to design a URL shortener that can handle 100M requests per day, and the short URLs should never expire. Is that correct?" This catches misunderstandings early and shows you listen carefully. **Step 2: Ask clarifying questions (1-2 minutes)** This is where most people skip ahead. Don't. Always ask: For coding problems: - "What's the expected input size?" - "Should I optimize for time or space complexity?" - "Are there any constraints on the data?" For system design: - "What's the scale? (Users, requests, data size)" - "What's more important: read or write performance?" - "Do we need to worry about consistency or can we be eventually consistent?" For data/analytics: - "What decision will this analysis inform?" - "What's the time frame we're analyzing?" - "Are there any data quality issues I should know about?" **Step 3: State your approach before writing code (1-2 minutes)** "I'm thinking of using a hash table to store the mappings because lookups will be O(1). I'll use base62 encoding for the short URL. Does that approach make sense before I dive in?" This gives them a chance to course-correct you before you waste 15 minutes on the wrong approach. **Step 4: Think out loud while solving (10-15 minutes)** Say everything you're thinking: - "I'm writing a helper function to handle this edge case" - "This loop is O(n^2) which isn't ideal, but I'll optimize after I get it working" - "I'm considering two approaches: A would be simpler but slower, B would be faster but more complex" **Why this matters:** Even if you don't finish, they can see your problem-solving process. That's what they're evaluating. **Step 5: Test your solution (2-3 minutes)** Don't wait for them to ask. Say: "Let me test this with a few cases: - Normal case: [example] - Edge case: [example] - Error case: [example]" This shows you think about code quality, not just "does it compile?" **Step 6: Discuss trade-offs and improvements (2-3 minutes)** "This solution is O(n log n) time and O(n) space. If we need better performance, we could use [alternative approach], but that would trade off [something else]." This shows senior-level thinking: you understand there's no perfect solution, only trade-offs. **Your prep (60 minutes):** 1. Pick 5 problems from LeetCode/HackerRank relevant to the role 2. Solve each one using the 6-step framework OUT LOUD (pretend you're in an interview) 3. Record yourself or practice with a friend 4. Focus on articulating your thought process, not just getting the right answer ## Case Interviews: The Issue Tree Method Case interviews (common in consulting, strategy roles, some PM roles) test structured thinking. The mistake most people make: jumping to solutions before structuring the problem. **The Issue Tree Framework:** **Step 1: Clarify the objective (1 minute)** "So the objective is to determine whether Company X should expand into the European market. What's the timeframe for this decision?" **Step 2: Structure the problem (2-3 minutes)** Draw an issue tree on the whiteboard. Break the problem into mutually exclusive, collectively exhaustive (MECE) categories. **Example: "Should we expand to Europe?"** Level 1: - Market Attractiveness - Company Readiness - Competitive Landscape Level 2 under Market Attractiveness: - Market size and growth - Customer willingness to pay - Regulatory environment **Pro tip:** Use standard frameworks as starting points: - Profitability = Revenue - Costs - Market Entry = Market / Company / Competition - Product Launch = Customer / Product / Go-to-Market **Step 3: Prioritize what to analyze (30 seconds)** "Given our constraints, I think Market Attractiveness is the most critical factor. If the market isn't attractive, the other factors don't matter. Do you agree we should start there?" **Step 4: Work through the analysis (10-15 minutes)** For each branch: 1. State your hypothesis 2. Ask for data or make reasonable assumptions 3. Do the math 4. State what the data tells you **Always show your work:** "100M potential customers × 20% adoption × $50/year = $1B market opportunity" **Step 5: Synthesize and recommend (2-3 minutes)** "Based on our analysis: - Market is attractive: $1B opportunity with 25% growth - Company is ready: we have necessary capabilities - Competition is moderate: 2 major players, but differentiation possible **Recommendation:** Yes, expand to Europe. But I'd start with UK and Germany (80% of opportunity) to test before full rollout." **Your prep (60 minutes):** 1. Find 3 practice cases (Case Interview Prep, consulting firm websites) 2. Do each case using the Issue Tree Method 3. Practice drawing trees on paper—you'll do this on a whiteboard 4. Focus on structure over speed ## The Night-Before Checklist (30 minutes) **Research the interviewers (10 minutes):** - Look them up on LinkedIn - Read anything they've written - Note one specific thing to mention: "I saw you worked on Project X—I'd love to hear about that" **Review the company (10 minutes):** - Recent news (last 30 days) - Product/service you'll be working on - Their mission/values (so you can tie your answers to them) **Prep your questions (10 minutes):** Have 5 questions ready. Not generic ones ("What's the culture like?") but specific ones: - "I saw you recently launched [product]. How is that changing the team's priorities?" - "What does success look like for this role in the first 6 months?" - "What's the biggest challenge the team is facing right now?" - "How does this role contribute to [company objective you researched]?" - "What do people who succeed here have in common?" ## Your Next Action **For your next interview:** **3 days before:** - 90 minutes: Prepare your 16 STAR stories (if behavioral interview) - 60 minutes: Practice 5 problems using Think-Aloud Protocol (if technical) - 60 minutes: Practice 3 cases using Issue Tree Method (if case interview) **Night before:** - 30 minutes: Run through the Night-Before Checklist **Day of:** - Review your prep for 15 minutes before the call - Take 5 deep breaths - Remember: they already think you're qualified (that's why they're interviewing you). Your job is to confirm it. **Total prep time: 3-3.5 hours** That's it. Not 3 weeks. Not reading 500 interview questions you'll never be asked. Three focused hours using proven frameworks beats three weeks of unfocused practice. Every time.
The Target List Method: How to Identify Your Next 20 Companies
By Templata • 6 min read
# The Target List Method: How to Identify Your Next 20 Companies Most job seekers apply to anything that matches their job title. Product Manager opening? Apply. Marketing role? Apply. Same industry? Apply. This spray-and-pray approach feels productive—you're applying to 10 jobs a day!—but it leads to terrible outcomes. Low response rates, mismatched interviews, and offers from companies you don't actually want to work for. **Here's what works instead: The Target List Method.** Instead of applying to 100 random companies, identify 20 specific companies where you'd actually thrive. Research them deeply. Build relationships there. Focus all your energy on those 20. The math is counterintuitive but proven: **20 targeted companies generate 3x more interviews than 100 random applications.** ## Why Most Job Searches Fail: The Attention Problem When you apply to 100 companies, you give each one 1% of your attention. You can't: - Research their business model - Understand their culture - Identify the right people to contact - Customize your approach meaningfully - Follow up strategically When you focus on 20 companies, each gets 5% of your attention. You can do all of the above. And it shows. > "Hiring managers can tell within 30 seconds if you've researched the company or you're mass-applying. The ones who've done their homework get interviews. The others get ignored." - Recruiter at Stripe (anonymous interview) ## The 6-Criteria Framework: How to Identify Your 20 Companies Your target list should be specific, not aspirational. "I want to work at Google" isn't a criteria—it's a wish. Here's the framework that actually works: ### 1. Industry or Market Segment Not "tech" or "healthcare"—too broad. Be specific: - **Good:** "B2B SaaS companies selling to healthcare providers" - **Good:** "Climate tech startups focused on carbon capture" - **Good:** "Consumer fintech apps with 1M+ users" **Why this matters:** Deep industry knowledge compounds. Your second interview in the same industry is easier than your first because you understand the problems. **Your action:** Pick 2-3 specific market segments. No more than 3—you need focus. ### 2. Company Stage and Size Different stages require different skills and offer different experiences. | Stage | Size | What You Get | What They Need | |-------|------|--------------|----------------| | **Seed/Series A** | 10-50 | High impact, chaos, equity upside, role ambiguity | Generalists who build from scratch | | **Series B-C** | 50-200 | Growing systems, defined roles, moderate equity | Specialists who scale processes | | **Late-stage/Pre-IPO** | 200-1000 | Structure, brand name, lower equity, career paths | Operators who optimize existing systems | | **Public/Enterprise** | 1000+ | Stability, benefits, name recognition, narrow scope | Specialists in established frameworks | **Your action:** Pick ONE stage that matches your risk tolerance and career goals. Don't mix seed-stage and enterprise—they require opposite skill sets. ### 3. Growth Indicators (Are They Actually Hiring?) A company you love that's not growing won't hire you. Look for concrete growth signals: **Strong signals:** - Recent funding round ($10M+ for your level) - Product launches or new market expansion - Multiple job openings in your function - Press about hiring or headcount growth - Office expansion or new locations **Weak signals:** - Haven't hired in your function in 6+ months - Layoffs or restructuring in last year - Only 1-2 job openings (might be backfills, not growth) **Your action:** Check Crunchbase, LinkedIn employee count, and job boards. Only add companies showing 3+ growth signals. ### 4. Cultural Fit (Beyond the Generic Values) Every company says "collaborative, innovative, customer-focused." That's useless. **Here's how to assess culture from the outside:** **Remote vs. In-Person:** - Do their job postings say remote, hybrid, or in-office? - Check LinkedIn: Where are employees located? **Pace and Intensity:** - Read Glassdoor reviews: Do people mention "fast-paced" (positive) or "burnout" (negative)? - Check employee tenure: Average 1-2 years = high intensity, 4+ years = sustainable **Decision-making Style:** - Engineering blog: Do they talk about experiments and iteration (data-driven) or vision and bold bets (founder-driven)? **Diversity and Inclusion:** - Look at team pages and LinkedIn: Does leadership reflect diversity? - Do they have ERGs or D&I initiatives listed? **Your action:** For each company, spend 30 minutes on their blog, Glassdoor, and LinkedIn. Eliminate companies where culture signals don't match your preferences. ### 5. Role Availability (Now or Soon) You're building a list for the next 3-6 months, not just today. **Three types of target companies:** **Type A - Actively Hiring (50% of your list):** - They have job postings for your role right now - You'll apply immediately **Type B - Growing But No Current Opening (30% of your list):** - Growth signals are strong - They've hired similar roles in the past 6 months - You'll do warm outreach and monitor **Type C - Dream Companies (20% of your list):** - You'd leave your current role for them even without a posting - You'll build relationships proactively **Your action:** Split your 20 companies into these three buckets. This balances immediate opportunities with longer-term relationship building. ### 6. Competitive Positioning (Can You Actually Win?) Be honest: Are you competitive for this role at this company? **You're competitive if you have 70%+ of:** - Required skills/experience - Industry background they prefer - Company stage experience - Education level (if specified) **You're not competitive if:** - You're missing core technical requirements - The level is 2+ steps above your current role - They explicitly require experience you don't have (e.g., "5 years in fintech" and you have 0) **Exception:** If you have a strong warm introduction, your competitiveness threshold drops to 50%. Referrals change the math. **Your action:** For each company, honestly assess: Am I 70%+ competitive? If no, replace it. ## Building Your List: The 4-Week Process **Week 1: Generate 50-100 Candidates** Use these sources: - LinkedIn: Search for companies by industry, size, location - Crunchbase: Filter by funding, stage, category - AngelList/Wellfound: Startup-specific search - "Best places to work" lists in your industry - Companies your friends/network work at - Competitors of companies you admire Cast a wide net. Quantity over quality at this stage. **Week 2: Apply the 6-Criteria Framework** Create a spreadsheet with these columns: - Company name - Industry/segment - Stage and size - Growth signals (list 3+) - Culture fit (Y/N after research) - Current openings (link if exists) - Competitive? (Y/N) Research each company for 20-30 minutes. This takes 15-20 hours total. Yes, it's work. That's the point—this is the work that actually matters. **Week 3: Narrow to 20** Eliminate anything that doesn't meet your criteria. You should have: - 10 companies where you're 80%+ competitive (safer bets) - 6 companies where you're 70% competitive (stretch opportunities) - 4 companies where you're 60% but have a warm connection (referral plays) **Week 4: Add Intel Columns** For each company, add: - Key people to contact (2-3 names from LinkedIn) - Recent news (product launches, funding, expansion) - Mutual connections (who can introduce you?) - Application strategy (direct apply, referral, hiring manager outreach) ## Real Example: How Sarah Built Her Target List **Sarah's criteria:** - Industry: B2B SaaS selling to marketing teams - Stage: Series B-C (50-200 employees) - Growth: Recent funding or expanding sales team - Culture: Remote-friendly, data-driven decision making - Role: Product Marketing Manager **Her initial list: 73 companies** **After applying criteria: 20 companies** **Breakdown:** - 10 actively hiring (she applied immediately) - 6 growing but no current PMM role (warm outreach to VPs of Marketing) - 4 dream companies (relationship building, no immediate role) **Results over 8 weeks:** - 12 first-round interviews (60% conversion from her actively hiring list) - 5 second-round interviews - 2 offers - Accepted role at her #3 target company Compare this to her previous search: 100 random applications, 3 interviews, 0 offers. ## Your Next Action **Today:** 1. Open a spreadsheet (Google Sheets or Excel) 2. Set up columns: Company, Industry, Stage, Growth Signals, Culture Fit, Competitive? 3. Spend 2 hours generating 30-50 company names using the sources above **This week:** 1. Research each company for 20-30 minutes 2. Apply the 6-criteria framework 3. Narrow to your top 20 **Week 2:** Add intel columns: Key contacts, recent news, mutual connections, application strategy The target list isn't just a tracking tool—it's your job search strategy. Build it right, and everything else (applications, outreach, networking) becomes focused and effective. While others are applying to anything that moves, you're building relationships with 20 companies that actually fit. That's how you go from "I can't get interviews" to "I have multiple offers to choose from."
Beating the Bots: The ATS System Recruiters Don't Want You to Understand
By Templata • 6 min read
# Beating the Bots: The ATS System Recruiters Don't Want You to Understand Your resume isn't being rejected by humans. It's being filtered out by software before anyone reads it. **75% of resumes are rejected by Applicant Tracking Systems (ATS)** before a recruiter ever sees them. These systems scan for keywords, parse your formatting, and rank candidates automatically. Get the formatting wrong, and you're #247 out of 250 applicants—invisible. Here's what recruiters know that you don't: ATS systems are predictable. Once you understand how they work, you can optimize your resume to consistently rank in the top 10%. ## How ATS Systems Actually Work When you click "Apply," here's what happens: 1. **Parsing:** ATS extracts text from your resume (name, email, work history, skills) 2. **Keyword matching:** Compares your resume to the job description 3. **Scoring:** Assigns you a match percentage (usually 1-100%) 4. **Ranking:** Sorts all applicants by score 5. **Human review:** Recruiters only look at the top 20-30 candidates The problem? ATS systems are terrible at parsing. Use a two-column layout? The system reads it left-to-right and scrambles your content. Add a text box with your summary? It might skip it entirely. > "We tested 1,000 resumes through our ATS. Identical qualifications, different formatting. The match scores ranged from 43% to 98%. Formatting was the only difference." - Jon Shields, Jobscan CEO The same resume. 43% vs 98%. That's the difference between "rejected immediately" and "top 5 candidate." ## The 7 Formatting Rules That Beat ATS Most resume advice focuses on content. But if the ATS can't parse your content, it doesn't matter how qualified you are. ### Rule 1: Use a Simple, Single-Column Layout **What fails:** - Two-column designs - Text boxes - Tables for layout - Headers/footers with critical info **What works:** - Single column, top to bottom - Standard section headers (Work Experience, Education, Skills) - Clean margins (0.5-1 inch) ### Rule 2: Use Standard Section Headers ATS systems look for specific headers. Get creative with naming, and it might skip entire sections. **ATS-friendly headers:** - Work Experience (not "Where I've Been" or "Career Journey") - Education (not "Academic Background") - Skills (not "What I Bring" or "Core Competencies") - Certifications (not "Credentials") ### Rule 3: Choose ATS-Compatible Fonts **Safe fonts:** - Arial - Calibri - Georgia - Times New Roman - Verdana **Fonts that cause parsing errors:** - Custom fonts - Script/handwritten fonts - Highly stylized fonts Size: 10-12pt for body text, 14-16pt for headers. ### Rule 4: Save as .docx (Not PDF) This is controversial because many articles say "PDF is fine." Here's the truth: **some ATS systems parse .docx better than PDF.** The safest approach: 1. Create your resume in Word (.docx) 2. If the application allows you to choose format, upload .docx 3. If PDF is required, use PDF (but test it first - see Rule 7) ### Rule 5: Avoid Graphics, Images, and Icons Every icon, chart, or photo reduces your parse rate. ATS can't read images—it just skips them. **What to remove:** - Headshot photos - Skill bar charts ("Proficiency: ████░░░░") - Icons for contact info (✉️ 📱) - Logos for companies/certifications - Charts showing project impact **What to use instead:** - Plain text: "Email: name@email.com" (not just an icon) - Bullet points for skills: "Python, SQL, Tableau" - Written descriptions: "Led team of 8" (not a chart) ### Rule 6: Use Standard Date Formatting ATS systems expect dates in specific formats. Get fancy, and it might not recognize your employment dates. **ATS-friendly:** - January 2022 - Present - 01/2022 - Present - 2022 - 2024 **ATS-unfriendly:** - Jan '22 - Now - 2022 → 2024 - Winter 2022 - Summer 2024 ### Rule 7: Test Your Resume in an ATS Simulator Before you apply anywhere, test your resume. Upload it to Jobscan, Resume Worded, or TopResume's ATS checker (all have free versions). **What to check:** - Does it parse all sections correctly? - Are dates recognized? - Is your contact info extracted properly? - Are skills captured accurately? If anything's wrong, the ATS at real companies will have the same issues. ## The Keyword Strategy That Gets You to 80%+ Match Rate Formatting gets you parsed correctly. Keywords get you ranked high. ### The Job Description Mining Method Most people skim the job description. Here's what to do instead: **Step 1: Extract exact phrases** Copy the entire job description into a Word doc. Highlight every: - Required skill - Preferred skill - Tool/technology mentioned - Certification requested - Years of experience specified **Step 2: Map to your experience** For each highlighted item, write down where you've used that skill/tool. Be specific: - Not just "Python" but "Python (pandas, scikit-learn) for data analysis" - Not just "project management" but "Agile project management using Jira" **Step 3: Mirror their language** If the job says "stakeholder management," use "stakeholder management" (not "client relations"). If they say "cross-functional collaboration," use that exact phrase. ATS systems do literal keyword matching. Synonyms don't count. ### The 80% Rule **You don't need to match 100% of the job description.** Aim for 75-85% keyword match. **Why?** - 100% match looks suspicious (ATS flags potential keyword stuffing) - 75-85% puts you in the top tier without triggering filters - Leaves room for unique skills that differentiate you ### Where to Place Keywords Not all resume sections are weighted equally by ATS. Here's the priority: **Highest weight:** 1. Skills section (dedicated "Skills" or "Technical Skills" section) 2. Work experience bullet points 3. Job titles and company names **Medium weight:** 4. Resume summary/objective 5. Education section **Lowest weight:** 6. Certifications 7. Awards/Publications **Action plan:** - Create a dedicated Skills section with 15-20 keywords from the job description - Weave 10-15 more keywords into your bullet points (naturally, not forced) - Include 3-5 in your summary if you have one ## The Real-World Test: Before and After **Sarah Chen - Marketing Manager → Senior Marketing Manager** **Before (ATS score: 37%)** - Creative two-column layout - Skills shown as bar charts - Custom section: "My Professional Journey" - Generic bullet points: "Managed marketing campaigns" **After (ATS score: 89%)** - Simple single-column layout - Text-based skills section with keywords from job description - Standard section: "Work Experience" - Keyword-optimized bullets: "Led integrated marketing campaigns using HubSpot and Salesforce, resulting in 34% increase in qualified leads" **Result:** 3 interviews in the first week vs. 0 interviews in 3 weeks prior. ## The One Thing Most People Get Wrong **Myth: "I need a different resume for every job."** **Reality: You need a master resume + 20 minutes of customization.** Here's the efficient approach: 1. **Create a master resume** with ATS-friendly formatting (following all rules above) 2. **For each application:** - Copy your master resume - Add 5-10 keywords from the specific job description to your Skills section - Adjust 2-3 bullet points to mirror their language - Run through ATS checker to verify 75%+ match - Apply This takes 15-20 minutes per application vs. 2-3 hours of complete rewrites. ## Your Next Action **Today:** 1. Upload your current resume to Jobscan or Resume Worded 2. Check the parsing results—are all sections captured correctly? 3. If not, fix formatting using the 7 rules above **This week:** 1. Find 3 job descriptions for roles you want 2. Extract keywords using the Job Description Mining Method 3. Update your master resume with relevant keywords 4. Test it again—aim for 75%+ match rate **Before every application:** Spend 15 minutes customizing your master resume for that specific role. Check the ATS match score. Only apply if you're 70%+. The ATS isn't your enemy—it's a predictable system. Once you know the rules, you can consistently rank in the top 10% of applicants. That's the difference between being invisible and being interviewed.
The Hidden Job Market: Why 70% of Jobs Never Get Posted
By Templata • 5 min read
# The Hidden Job Market: Why 70% of Jobs Never Get Posted Most job seekers waste months sending applications into black holes. Here's what they don't know: **70% of jobs are never posted publicly.** They're filled through referrals, internal candidates, and direct outreach before a job description ever hits LinkedIn. The hidden job market isn't a myth—it's how companies actually hire. And accessing it requires a completely different strategy than clicking "Apply Now." ## Why Companies Don't Post Jobs Publicly When Airbnb needed a Director of Product, they didn't post it. When Stripe expanded their enterprise sales team, no job boards. Why? **The real cost of public postings:** - 250+ applications per role (industry average) - 40+ hours of recruiter time screening resumes - 80% unqualified candidates - 6-8 weeks to fill the position Compare that to: "Hey, do you know anyone great for this role?" One Slack message, three introductions, hired in two weeks. > "The best candidates are rarely actively looking. We hire through referrals because passive candidates are already vetted by someone we trust." - Laszlo Bock, former SVP of People Operations at Google Companies prefer the hidden market because it's faster, cheaper, and produces better-fit candidates. ## The Three Channels That Actually Work Forget spray-and-pray applications. Focus on these three channels that consistently outperform job boards: ### 1. The Warm Referral (10x Response Rate) A referred candidate is **14x more likely to get hired** than a cold applicant (LinkedIn data). But most people ask for referrals wrong. **The bad way:** "Can you refer me for the PM role?" **The good way:** "I saw [Company] is expanding into healthcare tech. Given my background in [specific experience], would it make sense for me to talk to [specific hiring manager]?" The difference: You're not asking for a favor—you're presenting a match and making it easy for them to help. **Your action plan:** 1. Make a list of 20 target companies 2. Search LinkedIn for 1st and 2nd connections at each 3. Send this exact message to 3-5 people per week: "Hi [Name], I'm exploring opportunities in [industry/function] and [Company] keeps coming up. I have [specific experience/skill] that seems relevant to [specific team/problem]. Would a 15-minute call make sense to learn about [specific aspect]?" ### 2. Direct Hiring Manager Outreach (Response Rate: 20-30%) Recruiters get 100+ emails per day. Hiring managers get 10. And hiring managers have the power to create positions that don't exist yet. **How to find hiring managers:** - LinkedIn: Search "[Company] [Department] Director/VP/Head" - Company website: Look at the "About" or "Team" pages - Tech: Check GitHub contributors for engineering roles **The outreach formula that works:** Subject: [Specific skill/experience] for [Their team/project] "Hi [Name], I noticed [Company] recently [specific event: funding, product launch, expansion]. I have [specific experience] in [relevant area] and wondered if you're building out your team in this area. [One sentence: specific problem you can solve] Would a brief call make sense? I've attached my background for context. [Your Name]" **Why this works:** You're demonstrating research, offering value, and making it easy to say yes or no. ### 3. The Strategic Introduction (Quality Over Quantity) This is the most underused channel. Instead of asking for jobs, ask for introductions to people doing interesting work. **The framework:** 1. Identify 10 people whose career path you admire 2. Study their work (articles, talks, projects) 3. Send a thoughtful message about their specific work 4. Ask ONE specific question 5. Build the relationship over 2-3 months 6. When opportunities arise, you're top of mind **Real example:** Marcus was a consultant wanting to break into tech. He didn't apply to Google. Instead: - Reached out to 5 Google PMs who'd written about healthcare tech - Asked specific questions about their transition to tech - Shared insights from his consulting work - 3 months later, one PM said "We're hiring for a special project. Want to talk?" He got the role before it was posted. ## The Application Strategy That Complements Hidden Market Tactics You should still apply to posted roles—but strategically, not desperately. **The 80/20 rule:** - 20% of your time: Applications to posted roles (10-15 high-fit positions/week) - 80% of your time: Networking, outreach, building relationships **How to apply strategically:** 1. Apply to the posted role (this creates a record in their system) 2. Same day: Find the hiring manager on LinkedIn 3. Send them the direct outreach message above 4. Mention you applied through their system 5. Follow up with a relevant connection if you have one This approach gets you in the system AND on their radar. You're no longer application #247—you're the person who showed initiative. ## The Timeline: What to Expect **Week 1-2:** Research and build your target list **Week 3-4:** Start outreach (expect 10-20% response rate) **Week 5-8:** First conversations and interviews begin **Week 9-12:** Serious interviews and offers start coming This timeline assumes 10-15 outreach messages per week. Less outreach = longer timeline. > "Most people give up after 2 weeks of applying. The hidden market takes 4-6 weeks to generate momentum, but that's exactly why it works—there's less competition." - Steve Dalton, The 2-Hour Job Search ## Your Next Action **Today:** 1. Make a list of 20 companies you'd want to work for 2. For each company, find 2-3 people (connections, hiring managers, or interesting employees) 3. Craft your outreach message using the formula above 4. Send 3 messages this week **This week:** Aim for 5-10 outreach messages. Track your response rate. Adjust your message if you're getting less than 10% responses. **This month:** Build it into a system. Every Monday: identify targets. Tuesday-Thursday: send outreach. Friday: follow up on conversations. The hidden job market isn't hidden—it's just intentional. While others send 100 applications into the void, you're having conversations with people who can hire you. That's the difference between a 3-month search and a 3-week search.
The Career Change Timeline: Your Month-by-Month Roadmap
By Templata • 6 min read
# The Career Change Timeline: Your Month-by-Month Roadmap Everyone wants to know: "How long will this take?" The honest answer: **9-18 months from decision to starting your new job.** That probably sounds longer than you hoped. But here's the thing: that timeline includes people who waste 6 months "exploring" without a plan. If you're systematic, you can do it in 9-12 months. If you're aggressive and have savings, 6-9 months. This reading gives you the month-by-month roadmap so you know exactly what to do when. ## Why Career Changes Take Longer Than You Think **What people imagine:** - Month 1-2: Take a course - Month 3: Build a portfolio - Month 4: Apply to jobs - Month 5: Get hired **What actually happens:** - Month 1-3: Research and validate the field (most people skip this and regret it later) - Month 4-6: Learn skills and build portfolio - Month 7-9: Apply, interview, negotiate - Month 10-12: Notice period at old job + start new role The people who try to compress Months 1-3 into 2 weeks end up wasting Months 4-12 pursuing the wrong field. > "The fastest way to change careers is to do the research phase slowly and the execution phase quickly. Most people do the opposite." - Herminia Ibarra, Working Identity ## The Two Timelines: Slow Transition vs. Fast Transition **Choose your approach based on your situation:** ### Slow Transition (12-18 months) - You're employed and can't quit - You're working nights/weekends - You have financial obligations (mortgage, kids, etc.) - You need to save money for potential pay cut - Lower risk, longer timeline ### Fast Transition (6-9 months) - You have 6+ months of savings - You can work on this full-time - You're willing to take financial risk - You've already validated the field choice - Higher risk, faster timeline **This roadmap covers the Slow Transition (12-18 months).** If you're doing Fast Transition, compress each phase by 30-40%. ## Phase 1: Research & Validation (Months 1-3) ### Month 1: Self-Assessment **Time commitment:** 5-10 hours/week **Goals:** - Complete the Skills Transfer Audit - Identify 2-4 potential target fields - Start consuming industry content **Specific actions:** **Week 1-2:** - Read "The Skills Transfer Audit" and complete the 3-Layer Skill Stack exercise - List your Layer 1 (Core Transferable) skills - Identify 3-4 fields where those skills might apply **Week 3-4:** - For each potential field, join 2-3 online communities (Slack, Discord, Reddit) - Follow 10-20 practitioners on LinkedIn/Twitter - Listen to 5 podcast episodes or read 5 blog posts per field - Goal: Start to get a feel for which field resonates **Outputs by end of Month 1:** - Skills Transfer Audit completed - 2-4 target fields identified - Basic understanding of how each field talks about their work **Real Example: Sarah** Sarah (teacher) identified: - UX Design (designing experiences for different users) - Product Management (understanding user needs, scoping solutions) - Learning & Development (corporate training) - Instructional Design (online course creation) After consuming content, she narrowed to UX and Product Management for deeper research. ### Month 2: Field Research **Time commitment:** 8-12 hours/week **Goal:** Complete The 3-Interview Method for each target field **Specific actions:** **Week 1:** - For each field, identify 2-3 people in each category: - The Escaped (left the field) - The Lifer (10+ years, still in it) - The Recent Switcher (changed careers into it 1-2 years ago) - Draft outreach messages using the template from "The 3-Interview Method" **Week 2-4:** - Conduct 6-9 informational interviews (2-3 per field) - Take detailed notes on: - What people love vs. hate - Realistic timelines to get hired - Skills that actually matter - Red flags and dealbreakers **Outputs by end of Month 2:** - 6-9 informational interviews completed - Notes on realistic expectations for each field - Gut sense of which field is actually right **Red flag:** If you can't get anyone to respond to your interview requests, that might tell you something about the field's openness to career changers. ### Month 3: Decision & Financial Planning **Time commitment:** 10-15 hours **Goal:** Make your field decision and create financial plan **Specific actions:** **Week 1-2:** - Review all interview notes - Make a decision: Which field are you committing to? - If you can't decide between 2 fields, pick the one with: - More people willing to help (strong community) - Clearer path to entry (more career switcher stories) - Better financial trajectory **Week 3-4:** - Read "The Real Cost of Career Change: A 24-Month Financial Model" - Calculate your specific costs (learning, job search, pay cut) - Create savings target and timeline - Decide: Slow transition (stay employed) or fast transition (quit and focus full-time)? **Outputs by end of Month 3:** - ✅ Field decision made - ✅ Financial model completed - ✅ Transition timeline chosen (slow or fast) - ✅ Savings goal established **Checkpoint:** By the end of Month 3, you should be able to say: "I'm transitioning to [specific field] and I need [specific amount] saved to do it safely over [specific timeline]." ## Phase 2: Build Credibility (Months 4-9) This is where most career changers spend the bulk of their time. You're learning skills and building proof. ### Months 4-6: Learn Your Minimum Viable Skillset **Time commitment:** 10-20 hours/week **Goal:** Achieve demonstrable competence in 2-4 core skills **Specific actions:** **Month 4: Skill Identification & Foundation** - Read "The Minimum Viable Skillset" - Analyze 20 job descriptions to identify your MVS (2-4 skills) - Enroll in 1-2 structured courses for each skill - Complete foundational learning (tutorials, exercises) **Month 5: Applied Practice** - Build 2-3 portfolio projects (NOT tutorial projects) - Each project should demonstrate 2+ MVS skills - Focus on solving real problems, not perfect execution **Month 6: Feedback & Iteration** - Share work in communities for feedback - Iterate based on feedback - Polish 2-3 best projects for portfolio **Outputs by end of Month 6:** - 2-4 skills learned to "demonstrable competence" - 2-3 portfolio projects completed - Portfolio website/GitHub with project writeups **Real Example: Jamie (Accountant → Data Analyst)** Month 4: Learned SQL and Python basics via DataCamp Month 5: Built 3 projects: - Analysis of Airbnb pricing data (SQL + Python) - Personal finance dashboard (Tableau) - Coffee shop sales analysis (SQL + Tableau) Month 6: Got feedback from r/datascience, refined projects, built portfolio site ### Months 7-9: Public Credibility & Strategic Networking **Time commitment:** 10-15 hours/week **Goal:** Make your work visible and build relationships **Specific actions:** **Month 7: Create Public Proof** - Write 2-3 blog posts or LinkedIn articles about your projects - Topics: "How I built [project]" or "What I learned [doing X]" - Share in communities where your target employers hang out - Start appearing in search results **Month 8: Strategic Networking** - Reconnect with people from Month 2 informational interviews - Share your portfolio: "Here's what I've built since we talked" - Ask: "Do you know anyone hiring for [role]?" - Join 1-2 industry meetups or events (virtual or in-person) **Month 9: Portfolio Polish & Resume Prep** - Read "Getting Past the Resume Screen" - Build career changer resume with skills-first format - Create 3 versions: targeted for top 3 types of companies you want - Write cover letter template you can customize **Outputs by end of Month 9:** - Portfolio website with 2-3 case studies - 2-3 published articles demonstrating expertise - Resume optimized for career changers - Network of 5-10 people in target field who know your work **Checkpoint:** By Month 9, you should be able to send someone your portfolio and have them say: "You can clearly do this work." ## Phase 3: Job Search & Transition (Months 10-15) ### Months 10-12: Active Job Search **Time commitment:** 15-25 hours/week (more if unemployed) **Goal:** Get interviews and offers **Specific actions:** **Month 10: Targeted Applications** - Apply to 10-15 highly targeted roles (not 100 random jobs) - Prioritize companies where you have warm intros - For each application: - Customize resume with keywords from job description - Write custom cover letter connecting your background to their needs - Include link to portfolio showing relevant project **Month 11: Interview Prep & Follow-ups** - You should start getting interview requests (if not, revisit resume/portfolio) - Prepare your career switcher narrative (see "The Career Switcher's Narrative") - Practice answering: "Why this field?" "Why now?" "Why you?" - For each interview, build a custom project/analysis for that company **Month 12: Negotiations & Decision** - If you have offers: negotiate (see "Asking for a Raise" guide—same principles) - If you don't have offers: diagnose the problem - Not getting interviews? → Resume/portfolio problem - Getting interviews but no offers? → Interview/narrative problem - Not getting responses? → Application targeting problem **Outputs by end of Month 12:** - Goal: 1-3 job offers - Reality: Many career changers need Months 13-15 | Metric | Successful Career Changer | Struggling Career Changer | |--------|--------------------------|---------------------------| | Application : Interview ratio | 5:1 to 10:1 | 50:1 or worse | | Interview : Offer ratio | 4:1 to 6:1 | 15:1 or worse | If your ratios are off, diagnose and fix BEFORE applying to more jobs. ### Months 13-15: Extended Search (If Needed) **If you haven't landed a job by Month 12:** **Diagnosis:** | Problem | Solution | |---------|----------| | No interview requests | Fix resume, improve portfolio, get warm intros | | Interviews but no offers | Work on narrative, practice interview skills, build company-specific projects | | Wrong roles/companies | Reassess targeting—apply to earlier-stage companies or adjacent roles | **Pivot strategies:** 1. **Internal transition** - Join target company in easier-to-get role, transition internally 2. **Adjacent role** - If you can't get "Data Analyst," try "Data Associate" or "Analytics Coordinator" 3. **Different company stage** - Startups hire more based on potential; enterprises want experience **Real Example: Marcus** Marcus (consultant → product manager) couldn't get PM interviews. Month 13: Pivoted to "Customer Success Manager" role at product-led startup Month 18: Transitioned internally to PM role Month 24: Moved to different company as PM with "1.5 years PM experience" Slower path, but it worked. ## Phase 4: First 90 Days & Beyond (Months 16-18+) ### Month 16-18: Settling Into New Role **Time commitment:** 50-60 hours/week (your new job!) **Goal:** Prove yourself and validate career choice **Specific actions:** **Month 16 (First 30 days):** - Absorb everything (processes, culture, team dynamics) - Ask tons of questions - Ship at least one small thing to build confidence - Build relationships with 3-5 key people **Month 17 (Days 30-60):** - Start taking on independent work - Identify your first "win" opportunity - Get feedback from manager on performance - Start contributing in meetings **Month 18 (Days 60-90):** - Complete "The 90-Day Reality Check" - Assess: Is this working? Am I on the right track? - Set 6-month and 12-month goals - If it's working: Lean in. If it's not: Course-correct. ## Compression Strategies: How to Do It Faster **If you want to compress from 15 months to 9 months:** 1. **Skip directly to one field** (save Months 1-2) - If you already know what you want, skip broad exploration - Risk: You might skip validation and regret it later 2. **Intensive learning** (compress Months 4-6 into 2-3 months) - Quit your job or take sabbatical - Bootcamp instead of self-paced courses - 40 hours/week instead of 10 hours/week - Cost: $10,000-20,000 + 3-6 months without income 3. **Leverage network** (compress Months 10-12) - If you have strong connections, warm intros can cut job search from 4 months to 6 weeks - Requires: You already know people in target field **Realistic compressed timeline:** 6-9 months if you're full-time and have network ## Your Next Step Where are you in the timeline right now? **If you're at Month 0:** Start with Month 1 this week. Complete the Skills Transfer Audit. **If you're at Month 3:** Make your field decision and financial plan. Don't delay. **If you're at Month 6:** Start building your portfolio. Stop learning, start building. **If you're at Month 12:** If you don't have offers yet, diagnose the problem. Don't just keep applying. **If you're at Month 18:** Complete the 90-Day Reality Check. Validate you're on the right path. The people who succeed at career change aren't the fastest. They're the ones who execute each phase fully before moving to the next. Don't rush Month 2 to get to Month 10 faster. You'll just waste Months 10-15 applying to the wrong jobs.
The 90-Day Reality Check: Signs You're on the Right Track (or Not)
By Templata • 6 min read
# The 90-Day Reality Check: Signs You're on the Right Track (or Not) You made it. You got the job. You've been in your new role for 90 days. Now the question that keeps you up at night: **Did I make a terrible mistake?** The first 90 days of any job are disorienting. But when you're a career changer, it's worse. You're learning the work AND learning the industry AND proving yourself AND dealing with imposter syndrome. Everything is hard. Everything takes longer than it should. The question is: Is this normal "new job is hard" or is this "I made the wrong choice and need to cut my losses"? Most career changers don't have a framework to tell the difference. They either panic and quit too early (wasting their entire transition investment) or stick it out too long in the wrong role (wasting years). Here's the framework that actually tells you: Are you on the right track or not? ## The Two Types of Hard Not all difficulty is the same. There's **growth hard** and **wrong-fit hard**. **Growth Hard (Good):** - You're challenged but engaged - You're learning fast, even if it's uncomfortable - Small wins are starting to show up - You can see a path to competence **Wrong-Fit Hard (Bad):** - You dread opening your laptop in the morning - You're not learning because the work doesn't interest you - No wins, just constant struggle - You can't imagine doing this for 5 more years > "The difference between a hard transition and a wrong transition is whether you're energized or depleted at the end of hard days." - Herminia Ibarra, Working Identity The 90-day mark is when you have enough data to tell which type of hard you're experiencing. ## The 90-Day Reality Check Framework Ask yourself these 12 questions. Be brutally honest. ### Category 1: The Work Itself **Question 1: When you solve a problem at work, do you feel energized or just relieved it's over?** ✅ **On track:** "I just debugged a complex issue and I'm excited to tell someone about how I solved it." ❌ **Wrong fit:** "Thank god that's done. Now I have to do it again tomorrow." **Question 2: Are you learning things you want to know, or things you have to know?** ✅ **On track:** You're reading articles, watching videos, asking questions because you're curious, not just to avoid failing. ❌ **Wrong fit:** Every minute of learning feels like studying for a test you don't care about. **Question 3: Do you have at least one "flow state" moment per week?** Flow state = losing track of time because you're absorbed in the work. ✅ **On track:** At least once a week, you look up and realize 2 hours passed without you noticing. ❌ **Wrong fit:** Every hour drags. You're constantly checking the clock. **Real Example: Sarah, Teacher → UX Designer** At 90 days, Sarah noticed: - She'd spent 3 hours on Saturday reading about interaction design patterns (not required, just interested) - When she got user feedback on her designs, she was excited to iterate (not defensive) - She'd entered flow state 2-3 times per week during design sessions Verdict: Growth hard. On the right track. **Counter-Example: Marcus, Consultant → Software Engineer** At 90 days, Marcus noticed: - He only coded during work hours, never read programming articles on weekends - Debugging felt like punishment, not puzzle-solving - He daydreamed about his old consulting job during code reviews Verdict: Wrong-fit hard. Time to reassess. ### Category 2: Progress & Competence **Question 4: Are you getting small wins?** You won't be senior-level at 90 days. But you should have some wins. ✅ **On track:** - You've shipped at least one thing (feature, project, analysis, design) - Someone has said "good work" or "this is helpful" - You've solved at least 3-5 problems on your own (without constant help) ❌ **Wrong fit:** - You haven't shipped anything meaningful - Every task requires heavy hand-holding - You can't point to a single clear contribution **Question 5: Is the learning curve starting to flatten (even slightly)?** ✅ **On track:** Week 1 was 100% confusion. Week 12 is more like 60% confusion. You can see progress. ❌ **Wrong fit:** Week 12 feels as confusing as week 1. No sense of progress. **Question 6: Can you explain what you do to a friend?** ✅ **On track:** "I design user interfaces. Last week I worked on improving the mobile checkout flow." ❌ **Wrong fit:** "Uh, I do stuff with... it's complicated. I don't really know how to explain it." If you can't articulate what you do after 90 days, you might not understand it well enough—which suggests either poor onboarding or wrong fit. ### Category 3: Cultural & Team Fit **Question 7: Do you feel like you CAN be yourself, or like you HAVE to be someone else?** All new jobs require some adjustment. But: ✅ **On track:** You're adapting to norms (meeting culture, communication style) but your personality fits. ❌ **Wrong fit:** You feel like you're performing a role. The culture makes you uncomfortable in a fundamental way. **Question 8: Do you have at least one person you'd grab coffee with outside of work?** ✅ **On track:** You've found 1-2 people you genuinely like and could see becoming actual friends. ❌ **Wrong fit:** Every interaction feels transactional. No one you'd want to hang out with. **Red flag check:** If you actively dislike most of your coworkers at 90 days, that's a culture problem, not a you problem. **Question 9: Does your manager support your learning, or expect you to already know everything?** ✅ **On track:** Your manager says things like "That's a great question" and "Let me show you how we do this." ❌ **Wrong fit:** Your manager seems frustrated by your questions or assumes you should already know things. > "A good manager of career changers treats the first 90 days like an extended onboarding, not a performance review." - Julie Zhuo, The Making of a Manager ### Category 4: Future Vision **Question 10: Can you picture yourself doing this work in 2 years?** Not "Am I good at it yet?" but "Do I want to get good at it?" ✅ **On track:** Yes. You can imagine being senior in this role and that sounds appealing. ❌ **Wrong fit:** The thought of doing this for 2 more years makes you want to quit. **Question 11: When you imagine going back to your old career, what do you feel?** ✅ **On track:** "No way. I'm glad I made this change, even though it's hard." ❌ **Wrong fit:** "Maybe I made a mistake. My old job wasn't that bad." **Question 12: Are you still excited about this field, or just this specific job?** ✅ **On track:** Even if this job isn't perfect, you're still interested in the field. You'd stay in the industry but might change companies. ❌ **Wrong fit:** You're not just frustrated with this job—you're questioning the entire field. ## Scoring Your 90-Day Reality Check Count your ✅ answers: **10-12 ✅ = Strong Signal (You're on the Right Track)** You're experiencing growth hard, not wrong-fit hard. The discomfort is normal. Stick with it. **Next steps:** - Focus on accelerating your learning (ask more questions, find a mentor) - Set 6-month goals for what you want to master - Start building relationships with senior people in your new field **7-9 ✅ = Mixed Signals (Reassess at 6 Months)** Some good signs, some concerning ones. Not time to quit yet, but worth investigating. **Next steps:** - Identify your specific pain points (is it the work, the company, the manager, the pace?) - Have honest conversation with manager: "What does success look like for me at 6 months?" - Talk to others who made similar transitions—is your experience normal? **4-6 ✅ = Warning Signs (Serious Reassessment Needed)** More wrong-fit signals than growth signals. Time for honest evaluation. **Next steps:** - Ask: Is this role wrong, or is this *field* wrong? - Talk to people 2-3 years ahead—do they love it or also struggle? - Consider: Would a different company in this field be better, or is the work itself the problem? **0-3 ✅ = Clear Wrong Fit (Time to Exit Plan)** This isn't working. The sooner you acknowledge it, the sooner you can course-correct. **Next steps:** - Don't quit impulsively, but start exploring: What specifically went wrong? - Was it the career choice, or just this role/company? - What did you learn about what you actually want? ## Real Examples: The 90-Day Reality Check in Action **Example 1: Jamie (Accountant → Data Analyst) - On Track** **Score: 11/12 ✅** - Loved solving data problems (flow state 3x/week) - Had shipped 4 small analysis projects - Learning curve flattening (could do basic SQL queries without Googling) - One close friend on team - Could picture doing this for years **One ❌:** Manager was hands-off (not great for a new analyst) **Action:** Jamie asked for weekly 1-on-1s and found a senior analyst to mentor them. By month 6, the ❌ became a ✅. **Outcome:** Still in data analytics 2 years later, promoted to senior analyst, loves the work. **Example 2: David (Marketing → Software Engineering) - Wrong Fit** **Score: 3/12 ✅** - Coding felt like a chore (never in flow state) - Hadn't shipped anything meaningful in 90 days - Still needed constant help (learning curve not flattening) - Daydreamed about marketing work - Couldn't picture doing this for 2 years **Three ✅:** Liked the team, respected the manager, small wins on documentation **Action:** David had honest conversation with himself: "I don't actually like coding. I liked the *idea* of being an engineer, not the reality." **Outcome:** Switched to product management (still in tech, but leveraging marketing background). Much better fit. **Example 3: Priya (Consultant → Product Manager) - Mixed Signals** **Score: 7/12 ✅** - Loved the strategic work (product roadmaps, user research) - Hated the pace (startup chaos, constantly shifting priorities) - Some wins, but felt like she was always behind - Great team, but too junior (everyone learning together, no mentorship) **Action:** Priya realized: "I love product management, but this startup environment is wrong for a career changer. I need more structure." **Outcome:** After 8 months, she switched to PM role at larger company with established PM team. Score jumped to 10/12. Same field, better environment. ## What to Do Based on Your Results ### If You're On Track (10-12 ✅) **You've de-risked your career change.** The hard part isn't over, but you've validated the decision. **Your next 90 days:** - Shift from "survive" to "thrive" mindset - Set skill development goals (what do you want to master by month 6?) - Start building your network in the new field - Document your learnings (you'll help future career changers) ### If You Have Mixed Signals (7-9 ✅) **Don't panic, but don't ignore the red flags either.** **Diagnose the problem:** | If the problem is... | The solution is... | |---------------------|-------------------| | Your specific manager | Can you switch teams internally? | | Company culture | Would a different company in same field be better? | | Skill gaps you can close | Double down on learning for 90 more days | | Fundamental disinterest in the work | Time to reassess if this field is right | **Give it 90 more days with a specific improvement plan.** Re-evaluate at 6 months. ### If It's a Wrong Fit (0-6 ✅) **This is painful, but the data is clear.** Staying longer won't make it better. **Two paths:** **Path 1: Pivot within the field** - Same industry, different role (e.g., from engineering to product management) - Same role, different company (e.g., from startup to enterprise) **Path 2: Course-correct entirely** - Acknowledge the career change didn't work - Analyze what went wrong (field choice? research process? bad luck?) - Decide: Go back to old field, or try a different new field? > "Failed career changes aren't failures if you learn what you actually want. That's data, not defeat." - Jenny Blake, Pivot **Most importantly: Don't beat yourself up.** 20-30% of career changes don't work out. The people who succeed long-term are the ones who course-correct quickly, not the ones who stick it out in the wrong role for years. ## Your Next Step This week, take the 90-Day Reality Check: 1. Answer all 12 questions honestly 2. Calculate your score 3. Share results with someone who knows you well (partner, friend, mentor) 4. Make a decision: Stick with it, reassess in 90 days, or start exit planning The career changers who succeed are the ones who check in regularly and course-correct when needed. 90 days is enough data to know if you're on the right track. Trust your data.
Getting Past the Resume Screen When You're a Career Changer
By Templata • 6 min read
# Getting Past the Resume Screen When You're a Career Changer Your resume is getting rejected before a human even reads it. First, it gets filtered by ATS (Applicant Tracking Systems) that scan for keywords. Then—if it makes it through—a recruiter spends an average of 6 seconds deciding if you're worth an interview. Six seconds. The traditional resume format doesn't work for career changers. It's designed for people with linear careers: Job 1 → Job 2 → Job 3 in the same field. Your resume says: Teacher → Teacher → Teacher, and you're applying for UX Designer. The recruiter's brain does this math in 2 seconds: "Wrong background. Next." **You need a different format.** One that leads with what you CAN do (skills + proof), not what you HAVE done (job titles in wrong field). ## The Problem: Traditional Resume Format **Traditional Chronological Resume (Doesn't Work for Career Changers):** ``` Name Contact Info EXPERIENCE Teacher, ABC School (2018-2024) - Taught math to 8th graders - Developed curriculum for 150 students - Managed classroom of 30 students Teacher, XYZ School (2015-2018) - Taught math to 7th graders - Created lesson plans - Coordinated with parents EDUCATION B.A. in Mathematics Education SKILLS Communication, Organization, Microsoft Office ``` **What the recruiter sees in 6 seconds:** - Job titles: Teacher, Teacher - Industry: Education, Education - Conclusion: "Wrong background for UX role. Next." **They never get to the part where your classroom management is actually stakeholder communication, or your curriculum design is actually user experience design.** ## The Solution: Skills-First Resume Format **The Career Changer Resume Structure:** 1. **Header** (Name, contact, portfolio link) 2. **Professional Summary** (2-3 lines positioning you for NEW role) 3. **Relevant Projects** (Portfolio pieces demonstrating new skills) 4. **Skills** (Technical skills for new field, with proficiency) 5. **Professional Experience** (Translated to highlight transferable skills) 6. **Education** (Keep brief unless directly relevant) **Why this works:** Within 6 seconds, the recruiter sees: - Professional summary positioning you for THIS role - Projects proving you can do THIS work - Skills matching THIS job description They form an opinion BEFORE they see your job titles. ## Section-by-Section Breakdown ### Section 1: Header **Include:** - Name - Location (city, state) - Email - Phone - **Portfolio/GitHub/LinkedIn** (CRITICAL for career changers) **Don't include:** - Physical address - Photo (in US) - Objective statement (that's what the summary is for) **Example:** ``` SARAH CHEN San Francisco, CA | sarah.chen@email.com | (555) 123-4567 Portfolio: sarahchen.design | LinkedIn: linkedin.com/in/sarahchen ``` > "For career changers, your portfolio link in the header is more important than your phone number. That's where the proof is." - Austin Belcak, Cultivated Culture ### Section 2: Professional Summary (The 6-Second Pitch) **Traditional (doesn't work):** *"Experienced educator seeking to transition into UX design. Strong communication and organizational skills with a passion for technology."* ❌ Problems: - Leads with old identity (educator) - Uses "seeking to transition" (sounds uncertain) - Vague skills (communication, organization) - "Passion" is meaningless without proof **Career Changer Format (works):** **Formula:** [New role title] with [X months/years] of [relevant experience] and proven ability to [key skill #1], [key skill #2], and [key skill #3]. [One sentence about unique value from old career]. **Example:** ``` UX DESIGNER with 10 months of hands-on experience designing mobile and web experiences. Proven ability to conduct user research, create high-fidelity prototypes, and iterate based on usability testing. Background in education brings unique perspective on designing for diverse user needs and breaking down complexity. ``` ✅ Why this works: - Leads with new identity (UX Designer) - Specific timeframe (10 months—honest but shows commitment) - Concrete skills matching job description - Old career reframed as asset, not liability ### Section 3: Relevant Projects (Your Secret Weapon) This is what most career changers miss. **Projects prove you can do the work.** **Format for each project:** ``` Project Name | Tools Used | Link One-line description of what you built - Bullet 1: What problem it solved - Bullet 2: Your specific contribution/methodology - Bullet 3: Results or key learning ``` **Real Example:** ``` PROJECTS Meditation App Redesign | Figma, UserTesting.com | sarahchen.design/meditation Redesigned onboarding and core user flows for popular meditation app - Conducted user research with 12 participants to identify friction points - Created wireframes, high-fidelity mockups, and interactive prototypes - Usability testing showed 40% improvement in task completion rates Local Coffee Shop Mobile Experience | Figma, Optimal Workshop Designed mobile-first ordering experience for local business - Led stakeholder interviews to define requirements and success metrics - Designed and tested 3 iterations based on user feedback - Presented final designs to business owner with implementation roadmap Personal Finance Dashboard | Tableau, Python | github.com/sarahchen/finance Built data visualization dashboard for tracking spending patterns - Cleaned and processed 2 years of transaction data using Python - Created interactive Tableau dashboard with 8 key metrics - Identified $400/month in optimization opportunities ``` **What this does:** - Proves you can do the work (not theoretical knowledge) - Shows your process (research → design → test → iterate) - Demonstrates tools/skills from job description - Links to portfolio for deeper dive **How many projects to include:** 2-4 for career changers (more is resume clutter) ### Section 4: Skills (ATS Keywords + Honesty) **Traditional format (doesn't work):** ``` SKILLS Communication, Leadership, Problem-Solving, Microsoft Office, Time Management ``` ❌ Too generic. No proof of proficiency. Doesn't match technical job descriptions. **Career Changer Format:** Organize by category with proficiency levels: ``` SKILLS Design Tools: Figma (Advanced), Adobe XD (Intermediate), Sketch (Basic) Research & Testing: User Interviews, Usability Testing, A/B Testing, Survey Design Design Process: Wireframing, Prototyping, Design Systems, Responsive Design Technical: HTML/CSS (Basic), JavaScript (Learning), SQL (Intermediate) Collaboration: Stakeholder Management, Cross-functional Teams, Agile/Scrum ``` **Why this works:** - Specific tools (ATS keyword matching) - Honest proficiency levels (builds trust) - Organized by relevance to target role - Includes "learning" for skills you're actively building (shows growth mindset) **Pro tip:** Pull keywords directly from job description. If 5 job postings mention "Figma," "User Research," and "Prototyping," those MUST be on your resume. ### Section 5: Professional Experience (Translation, Not Repetition) **The biggest mistake:** Listing your old job responsibilities exactly as you did them. **Traditional (doesn't work):** ``` Teacher, ABC Middle School (2018-2024) - Taught math to 8th grade students - Created lesson plans and curriculum - Graded assignments and provided feedback - Managed classroom of 30 students ``` **Career Changer Format (works):** **Formula:** Translate every bullet into the language of your NEW field. ``` Instructional Designer, ABC Middle School (2018-2024) - Designed learning experiences for 150+ users with diverse needs and learning styles - Conducted user research through surveys and 1-on-1 interviews to iterate on curriculum - Created assessment frameworks to measure engagement and comprehension metrics - Managed stakeholder communication with parents, administrators, and cross-functional teams ``` **What changed:** - Job title: "Teacher" → "Instructional Designer" (accurate but reframed) - Students → Users (language of UX) - Teaching → Designing experiences (reframed activity) - Grading → Metrics and assessment (data-driven language) - Parents → Stakeholders (business language) **Translation Table for Common Careers:** | Old Career Language | Translated to UX | Translated to PM | Translated to Data | |-------------------|------------------|------------------|-------------------| | "Taught students" | "Designed learning experiences for diverse users" | "Managed product adoption across user segments" | "Analyzed learning patterns across user cohorts" | | "Created lesson plans" | "Developed user flows and content strategy" | "Created feature specifications and roadmaps" | "Built analytical frameworks for measuring outcomes" | | "Managed classroom" | "Facilitated user testing sessions" | "Led cross-functional team coordination" | "Managed data collection processes" | | "Graded assignments" | "Evaluated user outputs against success metrics" | "Assessed feature performance using KPIs" | "Analyzed performance data to identify trends" | > "Don't change what you did. Change how you describe what you did. The skills are the same—the language is what matters." - Jenny Blake, Pivot **How many jobs to include:** 2-3 most recent (or most relevant). Career changers don't need 10 years of history. ### Section 6: Education **For career changers:** Only include if directly relevant or impressive. **If you did a bootcamp or certification:** ``` EDUCATION Google UX Design Professional Certificate (2024) 7-month program covering user research, wireframing, prototyping, and usability testing B.A. in Mathematics, UCLA (2015) ``` **If your degree isn't relevant:** ``` EDUCATION B.A. in Mathematics, UCLA (2015) ``` Keep it brief. Your projects and skills matter more. ## The ATS Optimization Checklist Before you submit, ensure your resume passes ATS filters: ✅ **Use standard section headers:** "Experience," "Skills," "Education" (not creative titles) ✅ **Include keywords from job description:** If they say "Figma," you say "Figma" (not "design tools") ✅ **Use standard file format:** PDF or .docx (never image files) ✅ **Avoid tables, columns, headers/footers:** ATS can't read them ✅ **Spell out acronyms first time:** "Application Tracking System (ATS)" ✅ **Match job title keywords:** If they say "Product Manager," use "Product Manager" not "Product Lead" **Test your resume:** Upload it to free ATS checkers like Jobscan or Resume Worded before applying. ## Real Example: Complete Career Changer Resume **DAVID MARTINEZ** Seattle, WA | david.martinez@email.com | (555) 234-5678 Portfolio: davidmartinez.dev | GitHub: github.com/davidmartinez | LinkedIn: linkedin.com/in/davidmartinez **SOFTWARE ENGINEER** with 14 months of hands-on development experience building full-stack web applications. Proven ability to write clean, maintainable code, collaborate in agile teams, and ship production-ready features. Background in journalism brings strong technical writing and user-focused problem-solving skills. **PROJECTS** **Task Management App** | React, Node.js, PostgreSQL, AWS | davidmartinez.dev/taskapp Full-stack web application for team project management - Built RESTful API with Node.js and Express handling 50+ endpoints - Designed PostgreSQL database schema and implemented complex queries - Deployed on AWS with CI/CD pipeline using GitHub Actions - Used by 3 teams for daily task tracking **News Aggregator** | Python, Flask, BeautifulSoup, Redis | github.com/davidmartinez/newsagg Automated news aggregation tool scraping and categorizing articles from 20+ sources - Implemented web scraping with rate limiting and error handling - Built caching layer with Redis reducing load times by 70% - Created API serving categorized content to front-end **Open Source Contributions** | JavaScript, TypeScript | github.com/davidmartinez Contributed to 3 open-source projects with 15+ merged pull requests - Fixed bugs in React component library (10k+ GitHub stars) - Added features to CLI tool for developers - Improved documentation and wrote unit tests **SKILLS** **Languages:** JavaScript (Advanced), Python (Intermediate), TypeScript (Intermediate), HTML/CSS (Advanced) **Frameworks:** React, Node.js, Express, Flask **Databases:** PostgreSQL, MongoDB, Redis **Tools:** Git, Docker, AWS, GitHub Actions, Jest **Practices:** Agile/Scrum, Test-Driven Development, Code Review, Technical Writing **PROFESSIONAL EXPERIENCE** **Freelance Software Developer** (2023-2024) - Built 4 client projects including e-commerce sites and data dashboards - Collaborated with designers and stakeholders to define requirements - Delivered projects on time using agile methodology and weekly sprints **Data Journalist**, The Seattle Times (2018-2023) - Built data visualization tools and interactive graphics using JavaScript and D3.js - Analyzed datasets with Python to uncover newsworthy patterns and trends - Collaborated with cross-functional teams (editors, designers, developers) on projects - Published 50+ data-driven articles reaching 100k+ readers monthly **EDUCATION** **App Academy Bootcamp** (2023) - Full-Stack Software Engineering **B.A. in Journalism**, Northwestern University (2018) --- **What makes this resume work:** ✅ Leads with current identity (Software Engineer), not past (Journalist) ✅ Professional summary positions him for target role ✅ Projects section proves he can code (before they see job titles) ✅ Skills match job description keywords (ATS passes) ✅ Old job translated into relevant language (data analysis, JavaScript, collaboration) ✅ 1 page (concise, focused) ## Your Next Step This week, rebuild your resume using the Career Changer format: 1. Write your professional summary using the formula 2. Add 2-4 portfolio projects with specific results 3. Translate your old job experience into new field language 4. Run it through an ATS checker Test it: Apply to 5 jobs and track response rate. If you're not getting at least 20-30% response rate, iterate on your format. The career changers who get interviews aren't the ones with the most impressive backgrounds. They're the ones whose resumes make it OBVIOUS they can do the new job—within the first 6 seconds.
The Career Switcher's Narrative: What to Say (and What Not to Say)
By Templata • 6 min read
# The Career Switcher's Narrative: What to Say (and What Not to Say) You've built your portfolio. You've learned your skills. You're applying to jobs. You get the interview. Then comes the question: **"So... why are you making this career change?"** Most people stumble. They apologize for their background. They talk about what they're *escaping from* instead of what they're *moving toward*. They position themselves as risky bets. The career changers who get hired do the opposite. They tell a story that makes their transition feel *inevitable*—like their old career was actually perfect preparation for this new one. This isn't about lying. It's about framing. Same facts, completely different story. ## The Two Narratives: Same Person, Different Outcomes **Meet Sarah. She's transitioning from teaching to UX design. Same background, two different ways to tell her story.** ### Narrative A (What NOT to Say): *"I've been a teacher for 8 years, but honestly, I'm just really burned out. The pay is terrible and the administration is frustrating. I've always been creative and interested in design, so I took some online courses and built a few portfolio pieces. I'm really excited to try something new and I'm a fast learner. I know I don't have professional experience yet, but I'm willing to work hard."* **What the hiring manager hears:** - Burned out and running away from something - No clear reason why UX specifically - Apologizing for lack of experience - Asking them to take a risk on you **Result:** "Thanks, we'll be in touch." (They won't.) ### Narrative B (What TO Say): *"I spent 8 years as a teacher, and what I discovered is that my favorite part wasn't the content—it was designing learning experiences. I'd spend hours thinking about: How do I present this concept so 30 different students with 30 different learning styles all understand it? How do I break down complexity? How do I know if it's working?* *That's when I realized I was doing user experience design—just for students, not products. So I started deliberately: I interviewed 3 UX designers who'd come from education, took the Google UX course, and redesigned 3 products I actually use. What excited me was the same problem-solving, but at scale: designing for 30,000 users instead of 30 students.* *The portfolio pieces on my site show my process: user research, iteration based on feedback, and testing assumptions. My teaching background means I'm obsessive about clarity and meeting people where they are—which is exactly what good UX requires."* **What the hiring manager hears:** - Clear, logical progression (not running away, running toward) - Specific skills that transfer (user research, iteration, clarity) - Did the work to validate this wasn't a whim (3 interviews, course, portfolio) - Teaching background is now an *asset*, not a liability **Result:** "Tell me more about your portfolio pieces." **Same person. Same background. Completely different framing.** ## The Career Switcher Narrative Framework Your narrative needs to answer four questions, in this order: ### 1. Why This Field? (The Logic Question) **What NOT to say:** - "I wanted a change" - "I've always been interested in..." - "I heard it's a growing field" - "Better pay / work-life balance" These are *fine reasons* for you internally, but they don't answer the hiring manager's real question: **"Will you actually stick with this, or quit in 6 months when it gets hard?"** **What TO say:** Use the **Bridge Moment Formula**: *"In my previous role, I was doing [X]. What I discovered was that the part I loved most was actually [Y], which is really [core skill/problem in new field]. That's when I realized I wasn't in the wrong career—I was solving the right problems in the wrong context."* **Real Examples:** | Old Career | New Career | Bridge Moment | |------------|------------|---------------| | Journalist | Data Analyst | "What I loved was finding patterns in messy information and making them clear to readers—which is exactly what data analysis is." | | Retail Manager | Product Manager | "My favorite part was figuring out what customers actually needed vs. what they said they needed, then designing the store experience around that insight." | | Consultant | Software Engineer | "I kept building Excel models and thinking 'There has to be a better tool for this.' I started automating things with Python and realized I was more excited about building the tools than using them." | > "The best career change stories don't sound like changes at all. They sound like obvious next steps." - Herminia Ibarra, Working Identity ### 2. Why Now? (The Timing Question) **What NOT to say:** - "I'm burned out" - "I got laid off" - "I've been thinking about this for years" **What TO say:** Use the **Validation Stack**: *"I wanted to validate this wasn't just a passing interest, so I [specific actions over specific timeframe]. After [X months] of [concrete actions], I realized this wasn't a curiosity—it was where I needed to be."* **Real Example:** *"I wanted to make sure this wasn't just burnout talking. So over the last 8 months, I interviewed 5 people doing this work, took two courses, and built 3 portfolio projects on nights and weekends—while still doing my day job. By month 6, I was spending every spare hour on portfolio projects and had to admit: this isn't a side interest anymore, it's what I want to be doing full-time."* **Why this works:** Shows you're methodical, not impulsive. Reduces perceived risk. ### 3. Why You're Credible? (The Proof Question) **What NOT to say:** - "I'm a quick learner" - "I took a bootcamp" - "I'm passionate about this field" These are claims. Hiring managers want evidence. **What TO say:** Use the **Proof Triplet**: *"I've built credibility three ways: [1] Learned [specific skills] through [specific method], [2] Built [specific portfolio pieces] that demonstrate [specific competence], and [3] Got feedback from [practitioners/community/users] which I used to iterate."* **Real Example:** *"I've built credibility three ways: First, I learned SQL and Python through DataCamp and Coursera. Second, I built three analysis projects—including working with a local business to analyze their sales data and present insights. Third, I shared my work in data communities on Reddit and Discord and incorporated their feedback. The portfolio on my site shows the before-and-after based on that feedback."* **Why this works:** Concrete proof. Not "I can learn" but "I already learned." ### 4. Why This Company? (The Fit Question) **What NOT to say:** - "You're a great company" - "I love your product" - "I'm excited about the opportunity" **What TO say:** Use the **Insider Insight Formula**: *"I've been using [product] for [timeframe] and noticed [specific observation]. I actually built [portfolio piece] that addresses [related problem]. What excites me about this role is [specific thing about the job/team/product that connects to your background]."* **Real Example:** *"I've been using Notion for 2 years—started for personal notes, now I run my entire side project through it. I noticed the mobile experience feels like a port of the desktop app, not designed for mobile-first interactions. I actually redesigned the mobile navigation as a portfolio piece. What excites me about this role is the chance to think about these mobile-first design problems at scale, especially since my teaching background means I'm obsessed with making complex tools accessible."* **Why this works:** - Shows you've done research (not just applying everywhere) - Demonstrates you're already thinking like someone who works there - Connects your background to their specific needs ## The Complete Narrative: Put It All Together Here's how it sounds in a 90-second answer to "Why are you making this career change?" **Example: Teacher → UX Designer** *"I spent 8 years as a middle school math teacher, and what I discovered is that my favorite part wasn't the content—it was designing learning experiences for 30 students with completely different needs. I'd obsess over: How do I present this so everyone gets it? How do I test if it's working? How do I iterate when it's not?* *About a year ago, I realized I was doing user experience design—just for students, not products. I wanted to validate this wasn't just a passing thought, so I interviewed 3 UX designers who came from education, took the Google UX course, and redesigned 3 products I actually use.* *I've built credibility through my portfolio—which shows my user research process, design iterations, and usability testing. I shared this work in design communities and got feedback from working designers, which I incorporated. You can see the before-and-after on my site.* *I'm specifically excited about [Company] because I've been using [Product] for 6 months and I noticed [specific insight]. I actually built a portfolio piece redesigning [specific feature]. What draws me to this role is the chance to solve these design challenges at scale, with a team that clearly cares about [specific value from company research]."* **Total time:** 90 seconds **What you've communicated:** - Logical progression (not random) - Validation (not impulsive) - Credibility (actual proof) - Company fit (did your research) ## The "Red Flag" Questions (And How to Answer Them) **Q: "What if you decide this isn't for you after 6 months?"** ❌ **Don't say:** "I won't! I'm committed!" ✅ **Do say:** "That's a fair question. That's exactly why I spent 8 months validating this before making the switch. I didn't just read about it—I did the work. I've built [X projects], gotten feedback from [practitioners], and spent [Y hours] doing the actual work. At this point, I have enough experience to know this is exactly what I want to be doing." **Q: "You'll be working with people 5 years younger with more experience. How do you feel about that?"** ❌ **Don't say:** "That's fine, I'm humble!" ✅ **Do say:** "Honestly, that's ideal. I want to learn from people who've been doing this longer than I have. In my previous career, I was senior enough that I wasn't learning as much anymore. Part of why I'm making this change is because I want to be in learning mode again—and having teammates with deep expertise is exactly what I need." **Q: "Why should we hire you over someone with 3 years of experience?"** ❌ **Don't say:** "I'll work harder!" or "Give me a chance!" ✅ **Do say:** "You shouldn't hire me instead of them—you should hire me *because* of what I bring that they don't. Someone with 3 years of [new field] experience has 3 years of [new field]. I have 8 years of [old field] which means I bring [specific transferable skill/perspective]. For this role specifically, [concrete example of how your background helps with their actual problems]." > "Never apologize for your background. Reframe it as unique preparation for exactly this role." - Jenny Blake, Pivot ## Common Narrative Mistakes (And How to Fix Them) **Mistake #1: The Apology Tour** ❌ "I know I don't have professional experience, but..." ❌ "I'm probably not as qualified as other candidates, but..." ❌ "I understand this is a risk for you, but..." **Fix:** Stop apologizing. You have evidence. Lead with what you CAN do, not what you CAN'T. ✅ "I've built three production-ready projects that demonstrate I can do [X, Y, Z]." **Mistake #2: The Vague Generalist** ❌ "I'm a quick learner and adaptable" ❌ "I'm passionate about this field" ❌ "I have strong communication skills" **Fix:** Get specific. Replace every general claim with specific evidence. ✅ "I learned SQL in 6 weeks and built a database analysis project that [specific result]." **Mistake #3: The Escape Story** ❌ "I hated my old job because..." ❌ "The pay was terrible and the work-life balance was awful..." ❌ "I was so burned out I had to make a change..." **Fix:** Never badmouth your old career. Even if it's true, it makes you seem negative. Reframe as moving TOWARD something, not AWAY from something. ✅ "My previous career taught me X, Y, and Z. Now I'm ready to apply those skills in a context where [positive thing about new field]." ## Your Next Step Write your 90-second narrative this week using the framework: 1. **Why this field?** (Bridge Moment Formula) 2. **Why now?** (Validation Stack) 3. **Why you're credible?** (Proof Triplet) 4. **Why this company?** (Insider Insight Formula) Practice it until it feels natural, not rehearsed. Record yourself. Does it sound defensive? Apologetic? Vague? Rewrite until it sounds confident and specific. Then test it: Use it in networking calls with people in your target field. Watch their reaction. Do they lean in or tune out? Iterate based on feedback. The career changers who get hired aren't the ones with the most impressive backgrounds. They're the ones who tell the most compelling story about why their background makes them *perfect* for this new role. Your story is your competitive advantage. Most career changers waste it by apologizing instead of framing.
The Minimum Viable Skillset: What You Actually Need to Learn
By Templata • 6 min read
# The Minimum Viable Skillset: What You Actually Need to Learn The biggest mistake career changers make: trying to learn everything before they feel "ready." You look at a job description listing 15 requirements. You panic. You sign up for 6 courses. You spend 18 months learning and still don't feel ready to apply. Here's the truth: **You don't need to know everything. You need to know the right 2-4 things.** The Minimum Viable Skillset (MVS) isn't about learning everything in your target field. It's about identifying the critical few skills that: 1. Appear in 80%+ of job descriptions 2. Can be learned in 2-4 months of focused effort 3. Can be demonstrated through portfolio projects 4. Signal credibility to hiring managers Everything else? You can learn on the job. ## The 80/20 Principle for Career Change > "The person who chases two rabbits catches neither. Career changers who try to learn everything end up learning nothing well enough to get hired." - Josh Kaufman, The First 20 Hours In any field, 20% of skills do 80% of the work. Your job is to find that 20%. **Traditional approach (doesn't work):** - Look at job descriptions - Try to learn everything listed - Spend 18-24 months "preparing" - Still feel unready - Never actually apply **MVS approach (actually works):** - Analyze 20 job descriptions - Find the 2-4 skills that appear in ALL of them - Learn those to "demonstrable competence" in 2-4 months - Build portfolio proving you have those specific skills - Apply with confidence in your MVS, honesty about the rest ## How to Identify Your Minimum Viable Skillset **Step 1: Collect 20 Job Descriptions (1 hour)** Don't just read job postings casually. Systematically collect 20 descriptions for your target role. Requirements: - Same job title (or very similar) - Companies you'd actually want to work for - Posted within last 3 months - Mix of company sizes (startup, mid-size, enterprise) Save them in a spreadsheet or document. You're looking for patterns. **Step 2: Tag Every Required Skill (2 hours)** Go through each job description and tag every skill mentioned in: - Requirements section - Preferred qualifications - Job description details Create a frequency table: | Skill | Times Mentioned | Percentage | |-------|----------------|------------| | SQL | 18/20 | 90% | | Python | 16/20 | 80% | | Data Visualization | 15/20 | 75% | | Statistics | 12/20 | 60% | | Machine Learning | 8/20 | 40% | | R | 6/20 | 30% | | Excel | 19/20 | 95% | **Step 3: Apply the MVS Filter (30 minutes)** Your Minimum Viable Skillset = Skills that meet ALL three criteria: ✅ **Criterion 1: Frequency > 75%** Appears in at least 15 out of 20 job descriptions. If it's not nearly universal, it's not minimum viable. ✅ **Criterion 2: Can be demonstrated in 3-6 months** You can build portfolio projects that prove competence. Rules out things like "5 years of experience" or "deep domain expertise." ✅ **Criterion 3: Measurable/Tangible** Not "communication skills" or "team player." Something you can point to and say "I built this." In the example above, the MVS for data analyst: 1. **SQL** (90%, demonstrable through queries/projects) 2. **Python** (80%, demonstrable through scripts) 3. **Data Visualization** (75%, demonstrable through dashboards) Not MVS: - Machine Learning (only 40% - nice to have, not critical) - R (only 30% - can learn if needed for specific role) - Excel (95% but you probably already know it, not a differentiator) **Your MVS = 2-4 skills.** If you have more than 4, you're not being selective enough. ## Real Examples: MVS by Target Role **Example 1: Product Manager** Analyzed 20 PM job descriptions at tech companies: | Skill | Frequency | MVS? | |-------|-----------|------| | Writing PRDs/specs | 85% | ✅ YES | | Stakeholder management | 95% | ❌ NO (can't build portfolio) | | Data analysis | 80% | ✅ YES | | User research | 70% | ❌ NO (below 75%) | | SQL/Analytics tools | 75% | ✅ YES | | Roadmap planning | 80% | ✅ YES | **MVS for Product Manager:** 1. Writing product specs (can demonstrate with sample PRDs) 2. Data analysis (can demonstrate with analytics projects) 3. SQL/Analytics tools (can demonstrate with dashboards) 4. Roadmap planning (can demonstrate with sample roadmaps) **Example 2: UX Designer** | Skill | Frequency | MVS? | |-------|-----------|------| | Figma/Sketch | 95% | ✅ YES | | User research | 85% | ✅ YES | | Wireframing | 90% | ✅ YES | | Prototyping | 80% | ✅ YES | | HTML/CSS | 45% | ❌ NO (below 75%) | | Design systems | 65% | ❌ NO (below 75%) | **MVS for UX Designer:** 1. Figma (can demonstrate with portfolio pieces) 2. User research (can demonstrate with case studies) 3. Wireframing (can demonstrate with design process) 4. Prototyping (can demonstrate with interactive prototypes) ## How to Learn Your MVS (The 90-Day Plan) Once you've identified your 2-4 skills, you need a systematic learning plan. **The Learning Stack:** > "Mastery doesn't come from reading. It comes from doing the thing badly, getting feedback, and doing it better." - Josh Kaufman, The First 20 Hours **Month 1: Foundation (Structured Learning)** Goal: Understand the fundamentals and basic syntax/concepts. - **Week 1-2:** Take one high-quality online course for each skill - Look for courses with projects, not just lectures - Free options: Coursera, edX, YouTube - Paid options: Maven, Udemy, Codecademy - **Week 3-4:** Complete the course projects - Don't skip the practice exercises - Take notes on concepts you don't fully understand - Build the tutorial projects even if they feel basic **Time commitment:** 10-15 hours/week **Cost:** $0-500 **Month 2: Application (Build Your Portfolio)** Goal: Create 2-3 original projects demonstrating each MVS skill. - **Week 5-8:** Build projects that solve real problems - Not tutorial projects - original work - Each project should demonstrate 2+ MVS skills - Focus on quality over quantity: 2 great projects > 5 mediocre ones **The Portfolio Project Formula:** | Project Type | What It Demonstrates | Example | |--------------|---------------------|---------| | **Analysis Project** | Data skills, problem-solving | "Analyzing 3 years of Airbnb pricing data to identify patterns" | | **Redesign Project** | Design skills, user thinking | "Redesigning the checkout flow for [real app]" | | **Spec/Proposal** | Strategic thinking, communication | "Product proposal for improving [real product feature]" | | **Technical Build** | Coding, implementation | "Building a tool that automates [specific task]" | **Time commitment:** 15-20 hours/week **Cost:** $50-200 (tools, software, hosting) **Month 3: Refinement (Get Feedback & Iterate)** Goal: Polish your portfolio pieces based on expert feedback. - **Week 9-10:** Get feedback from practitioners - Join Slack/Discord communities in your target field - Share your work and ask for specific feedback - Common question: "What would make this more professional?" - **Week 11-12:** Iterate based on feedback - Fix the most common feedback items - Add polish: documentation, visuals, case study writeups - Publish final versions **Time commitment:** 10-15 hours/week **Cost:** $0-100 ## Real Example: Jamie's 90-Day MVS Learning Plan **Background:** Jamie is transitioning from accountant to data analyst. **MVS identified:** 1. SQL 2. Python (basics) 3. Data visualization (Tableau) **Month 1: Foundation** - **Week 1-2:** DataCamp SQL fundamentals course (12 hours) - **Week 3-4:** Python for Data Analysis on Coursera (15 hours) - Completed all course exercises - Cost: $100 (DataCamp + Coursera) **Month 2: Application** Built three portfolio projects: **Project 1: "Seattle Airbnb Price Analysis"** - Downloaded public Airbnb data - Wrote SQL queries to analyze pricing patterns by neighborhood - Created Python scripts to clean and process data - Skills demonstrated: SQL + Python **Project 2: "Personal Finance Dashboard"** - Exported own bank data - Built Tableau dashboard tracking spending patterns - Skills demonstrated: Tableau + data cleaning **Project 3: "Coffee Shop Sales Analysis"** - Approached local coffee shop, offered free analysis - Analyzed 6 months of sales data - Created SQL queries + Tableau dashboard - Presented insights to owner - Skills demonstrated: SQL + Tableau + business communication Time: 60 hours over 4 weeks (15 hours/week) Cost: $70 (Tableau license) **Month 3: Refinement** - Week 9: Shared projects in r/datascience and Data Analyst Discord - Feedback: Add more documentation, explain methodology, clean up visualizations - Week 10-11: Updated all three projects based on feedback - Week 12: Created portfolio website with case studies Time: 40 hours over 4 weeks (10 hours/week) Cost: $50 (domain + Webflow) **Total investment:** 90 days, 127 hours, $220 **Result:** Jamie applied to 15 data analyst roles with portfolio links in resume. Got 6 interviews. Received 2 offers. Accepted role at $72k (previous accounting role: $68k). ## What You DON'T Need to Learn (Yet) This is just as important as what you DO need to learn. **Common things career changers waste time on:** ❌ **Advanced topics that appear in <50% of job descriptions** - Machine learning for data analysts (learn on the job if needed) - Advanced animation for UX designers (most roles don't need this) - Computer science algorithms for product managers (not relevant) ❌ **Certifications that don't demonstrate skills** - Generic PM certification courses - "Professional Scrum Master" when you're going into product - Certifications that test memorization, not application ❌ **Every tool/framework in the ecosystem** - Don't learn React, Vue, AND Angular - Don't learn Tableau, PowerBI, AND Looker - Learn ONE tool in each category ❌ **"Nice to have" skills from job descriptions** - Ignore the "bonus points if you have..." sections initially - Focus on "Required:" only > "Job descriptions are wish lists. The hiring manager would love a unicorn who knows everything. You don't need to be the unicorn. You need to demonstrate you can do the core job." - Austin Belcak, Cultivated Culture ## The MVS Test: Are You Ready to Apply? You're ready to start applying when you can confidently answer YES to all four: ✅ **Can you have a 15-minute technical conversation about each MVS skill?** Not just "I took a course" but "Here's a problem I solved using this skill." ✅ **Do you have 2-3 portfolio pieces demonstrating each skill?** Tangible proof you can do the work, not just talk about it. ✅ **Can you explain your learning process and what you'd do differently next time?** Shows self-awareness and growth mindset. ✅ **Are you honest about what you don't know yet?** "I haven't worked with X yet, but here's how I'd approach learning it" is way better than pretending you know everything. If you answered YES to all four, **you're ready.** Don't wait for perfection. ## Your Next Step This week, complete Step 1 and Step 2: 1. Collect 20 job descriptions for your target role 2. Tag every skill mentioned and create your frequency table 3. Identify your 2-4 Minimum Viable Skills Next week, start your 90-day MVS learning plan. Block the time. Treat it like a part-time job. Most career changers spend 18 months casually learning random skills and wondering why they're not making progress. MVS gives you focus: 90 days, 2-4 skills, portfolio proof. The question isn't whether you have time. It's whether you want to spend 90 focused days or 18 scattered months.
The Real Cost of Career Change: A 24-Month Financial Model
By Templata • 6 min read
# The Real Cost of Career Change: A 24-Month Financial Model Everyone knows career changes often mean taking a pay cut. What they don't realize: **the pay cut is the smallest part of the cost.** The real cost includes: - The 6 months of courses and portfolio building *before* you can even apply - The extended job search because you're competing against experienced candidates - The 12-18 months at a lower salary while you prove yourself - The signing bonus and stock options you forfeit by leaving mid-year - The opportunity cost of what you could have earned staying in your current field Add it up, and a "30% pay cut" can actually cost you $60,000-$120,000 over two years. Most career changers don't do this math until they're broke and panicking at month 8. Let's do it now, so you can plan properly. ## The 24-Month Financial Model Career change isn't a one-time cost. It's a 24-month financial journey with three distinct phases: **Phase 1: Building Credibility (Months 0-6)** Learning, building portfolio, networking. You're still in your current job but investing time and money. **Phase 2: The Transition (Months 7-12)** Job search and starting new role. This is where most people run out of money. **Phase 3: Climbing Back (Months 13-24)** Proving yourself and getting back to your previous earning level (or beyond). Let's break down the actual costs in each phase. ## Phase 1: Building Credibility (Months 0-6) **Average Cost: $2,500-$5,000** | Expense Category | Low End | High End | What It Covers | |-----------------|---------|----------|----------------| | Education/Courses | $500 | $15,000 | Online courses ($500) to bootcamp ($15,000) | | Tools/Software | $200 | $800 | Software licenses, domains, hosting | | Networking | $300 | $800 | Coffee chats, conferences, association memberships | | Portfolio Materials | $100 | $500 | Design tools, stock photos, printing | | Books/Resources | $150 | $300 | Industry books, subscriptions | | **TOTAL** | **$1,250** | **$17,400** | | **The Hidden Cost: Time** Most people focus on money, but time is the bigger cost. Building credibility takes 10-15 hours/week for 6 months. If you're working full-time, this comes from: - Early mornings (5-7am: 10 hours/week) - Evenings (8-10pm: 10 hours/week) - Weekends (Saturday mornings: 8 hours/week) > "The career changers who succeed are the ones who treat their transition like a part-time job before it becomes their full-time job." - Herminia Ibarra, Working Identity **Real Example: David, Finance → Software Engineering** David's Phase 1 costs: - Coding bootcamp: $12,000 (he chose intensive route) - VS Code, GitHub, Figma: $0 (free tiers) - Meetups and conferences: $400 - Coursera subscriptions: $200 - Total: $12,600 Time investment: 20 hours/week for 6 months = 480 hours Opportunity cost: Could have worked overtime for $60/hour = $28,800 **Total Phase 1 cost: $41,400** (money + opportunity cost) ## Phase 2: The Transition (Months 7-12) **Average Cost: $15,000-$45,000** This is where most people underestimate. The costs: **Income Reduction** Most career changers take a 20-40% pay cut for their first role in the new field. | Current Salary | 30% Pay Cut | Annual Loss | 12-Month Loss | |---------------|-------------|-------------|---------------| | $60,000 | $42,000 | $18,000 | $18,000 | | $80,000 | $56,000 | $24,000 | $24,000 | | $100,000 | $70,000 | $30,000 | $30,000 | | $150,000 | $105,000 | $45,000 | $45,000 | But wait—it's worse than that. **Extended Job Search** Career changers take 30-50% longer to find a job than candidates with direct experience. - Experienced candidate: 3-4 months average job search - Career changer: 4-8 months average job search If your job search takes 6 months instead of 3, that's 3 extra months of: - Health insurance (COBRA): $650/month × 3 = $1,950 - Reduced or zero income: Depends on your savings - Continued living expenses: $3,000-6,000/month × 3 = $9,000-18,000 **Forgone Bonuses and Benefits** Most people forget these: - Annual bonus (if you leave mid-year): $5,000-$20,000 - Unvested stock/options: $10,000-$100,000+ (especially painful in tech) - 401k match: 3-6% of salary - PTO payout (if not paid out): 2-4 weeks salary **Real Example: Sarah, Consulting → Product Management** Sarah's Phase 2 costs: **Old job (leaving in June):** - Base salary: $95,000 - Annual bonus (forfeited): $15,000 - Unvested stock: $0 (consulting firm, no equity) - 401k match forfeited: $0 (left after vesting) **Job search: 4 months** - COBRA health insurance: $720/month × 4 = $2,880 - Living expenses: $3,500/month × 4 = $14,000 - Continued learning/networking: $500 **New job (starting October):** - New base: $110,000 (looks like a raise!) - Pro-rated first year: $110k × 3/12 = $27,500 **Phase 2 Income Comparison:** - If she'd stayed: $95k base + $15k bonus = $110,000/year = $55,000 for 6 months - What she actually made: $95k × 6/12 = $47,500 (old job) + $27,500 (new job) = $75,000 - **Loss: $35,000** (not including $17,380 in expenses) **Total Phase 2 cost: $52,380** Even though her new salary was higher, her total 12-month income was $35,000 less due to timing. ## Phase 3: Climbing Back (Months 13-24) **Average Cost: $5,000-$15,000** You're in your new role, but you're not done paying. **Below-Market Compensation** Your first role in a new field usually pays 20-30% below market for someone with 2-3 years of experience. You need to prove yourself before you can negotiate up to market rate. Timeline to get back to "market rate": - High performers: 12-18 months - Average performers: 24-36 months - Poor fit: Never (you switch again) **The Catch-Up Calculation** | Scenario | Your Salary | Market Rate | Annual Gap | |----------|------------|-------------|------------| | Year 1 (career change) | $70,000 | $85,000 | $15,000 | | Year 2 (proving yourself) | $80,000 | $90,000 | $10,000 | | Year 3 (at market) | $95,000 | $95,000 | $0 | Over 24 months: $25,000 below market **Continued Learning Costs** You're not done learning. Most career changers invest another $1,000-3,000 in: - Advanced certifications - Industry conferences - Courses to fill skill gaps - Coaching or mentorship **Real Example: Marcus, Teacher → Software Engineer** Marcus's Phase 3 timeline: **Months 13-24 (Year 2 in new field):** - His salary: $75,000 - Market rate for developer with his skills: $85,000 - Gap: $10,000/year - AWS certification: $600 - Conference attendance: $1,200 - Advanced courses: $800 **Total Phase 3 cost: $12,600** BUT—at month 24, Marcus switched companies and jumped to $95,000 (above market rate, because he could now negotiate as "experienced developer with teaching background"). The investment paid off. ## The Total 24-Month Cost: Real Examples **Example 1: Sarah (Consulting → Product Management)** | Phase | Cost | Notes | |-------|------|-------| | Phase 1 (Building) | $3,200 | Online courses, portfolio site, networking | | Phase 2 (Transition) | $52,380 | Extended search, forgone bonus, income gap | | Phase 3 (Climbing) | $12,000 | Below-market comp for year 2 | | **TOTAL 24-MONTH COST** | **$67,580** | | Sarah's old career trajectory: $95k → $105k (year 2) = $200k over 24 months Sarah's new career path: $47.5k (old job 6mo) + $27.5k (new job 3mo) + $110k (year 2) = $185k over 24 months **Real cost: $15,000** (not including $20,500 in upfront expenses) **Example 2: David (Finance → Software Engineering)** | Phase | Cost | Notes | |-------|------|-------| | Phase 1 (Building) | $12,600 | Bootcamp, materials | | Phase 2 (Transition) | $68,000 | Long search (8 months), big pay cut initially | | Phase 3 (Climbing) | $18,000 | Slow climb to market rate | | **TOTAL 24-MONTH COST** | **$98,600** | | But David's calculation included the long game: - Old career ceiling: $120k (senior finance analyst) - New career ceiling: $180k+ (senior engineer in 5 years) He spent $98,600 over 24 months to unlock $60k+/year higher earning potential. ## How to Actually Afford This **Strategy 1: The Slow Transition (Lowest Risk)** Keep your current job, build credibility on nights/weekends, transition when you have an offer in hand. - Phase 1 cost: $2,500 (no income loss) - Phase 2 cost: $12,000-25,000 (pay cut when you switch, but no extended unemployment) - Phase 3 cost: $5,000-15,000 (below market comp) - **Total: $19,500-42,500** **Timeline: 12-18 months** **Strategy 2: The Gap Year (Medium Risk)** Save aggressively, quit your job, do intensive learning for 3-6 months, then job search. - Savings needed: $25,000-40,000 (6 months expenses + learning costs) - Phase 1 cost: $15,000-20,000 (bootcamp + living expenses) - Phase 2 cost: $15,000-30,000 (job search + pay cut) - Phase 3 cost: $5,000-15,000 - **Total: $35,000-65,000** **Timeline: 9-12 months** **Strategy 3: The Internal Transition (Lowest Cost)** Switch roles within your current company—from marketing to product, finance to data, etc. - Phase 1 cost: $2,000 (learning while employed) - Phase 2 cost: $5,000-15,000 (smaller pay cut, no job search, keep benefits) - Phase 3 cost: $3,000-8,000 (faster climb because you know the company) - **Total: $10,000-25,000** **Timeline: 6-12 months** > "The cheapest career change is the one that happens inside your current company. You keep benefits, skip the job search, and the pay cut is usually smaller because they know your work quality." - Jenny Blake, Pivot ## The Savings Target Formula **Minimum savings needed = (Monthly expenses × Search timeline) + Learning costs + 3-month buffer** Example: - Monthly expenses: $4,000 - Expected search: 6 months - Learning costs: $3,000 - Buffer: 3 months **Minimum savings: ($4,000 × 6) + $3,000 + ($4,000 × 3) = $24,000 + $3,000 + $12,000 = $39,000** Most people start with $10,000 saved and wonder why they're panicking at month 4. ## Your Next Step Run your own 24-month financial model this week: 1. **Calculate Phase 1 costs:** What will learning + portfolio building actually cost? 2. **Estimate Phase 2 timeline:** How long will your job search realistically take? 3. **Project Phase 3 gap:** What's the likely salary difference for your first role? 4. **Add it up:** What's your total 24-month cost? 5. **Compare to savings:** Do you have enough, or do you need to save more first? The career changers who succeed financially are the ones who do this math *before* quitting their jobs, not after. This isn't meant to discourage you. It's meant to help you plan properly so you don't run out of money at month 8 and have to take the first job that'll have you—instead of the right job for your new career.
Building Credibility Without Experience: The 6-Month Timeline
By Templata • 6 min read
# Building Credibility Without Experience: The 6-Month Timeline The career changer's paradox: Every job posting requires 2-3 years of experience. You have zero. How do you get experience when no one will hire you without experience? The answer most people try: "I'll just apply anyway and hope my transferable skills are enough." This doesn't work. Your resume gets filtered out by ATS (Applicant Tracking Systems) or rejected in 6 seconds by a recruiter. What actually works: **Building demonstrable credibility before you apply.** This isn't about getting a certification or doing a bootcamp and hoping that's enough. This is about systematically proving you can do the work—even before someone pays you to do it. ## The Credibility Timeline: 6 Months to "Experienced Enough" Most career changers think building credibility takes years. It doesn't. With focused effort, you can go from "complete outsider" to "credible candidate" in 6 months. > "Employers don't hire for past experience. They hire for future performance. Your job is to prove you can perform—with or without a formal job title." - Reid Hoffman, The Start-up of You Here's the month-by-month playbook that actually works: ## Month 1: Learn the Language **Goal:** Understand how people in this field actually talk about their work. Most career changers skip this step. They jump straight to certifications or building projects. Then they get into interviews and can't speak the language. They say "users" when the industry says "customers." They say "features" when the industry says "capabilities." Small differences that scream "outsider." **Action Plan:** **Week 1-2: Consume Industry Content** - Subscribe to 3-5 industry newsletters (not generic, but practitioner-focused) - Listen to 10 podcast episodes featuring people doing the job - Read 5 recent blog posts by practitioners, not journalists - Goal: Start recognizing patterns in how people describe their work **Week 3-4: Join the Conversations** - Join 2-3 industry Slack/Discord communities - Follow 20 practitioners on Twitter/LinkedIn (not influencers, practitioners) - Read but don't comment yet - you're learning the norms - Goal: Understand what questions are smart vs. what questions mark you as a newbie **Real Example: Alex, Teacher → Software Engineer** Alex spent January consuming dev content. Key insight: developers don't say "I'm learning to code." They say "I'm working on [specific project] using [specific technology]." The specificity signals credibility. By end of Month 1, Alex could hold a 15-minute conversation about software without sounding like a complete outsider. This became crucial in networking calls. ## Month 2-3: Build Your Minimum Viable Skillset **Goal:** Acquire the 2-4 hard skills that appear in every job description. Notice: 2-4 skills, not 20. Most career changers try to learn everything. You need to learn enough to be dangerous. **Action Plan:** **Week 5-8: Structured Learning (Pick ONE path)** - Option A: Intensive bootcamp/course (if you can afford time + money) - Option B: 2-3 focused online courses (cheaper, slower) - Option C: Apprenticeship model - learn by doing projects (free, requires discipline) **Week 9-12: Applied Practice** - Build 2-3 small projects that solve real problems - Not tutorial projects - actual solutions to actual problems - Document your process and decisions - Goal: Have artifacts that prove you can do the work > "The portfolio project that gets you hired isn't the biggest or most complex. It's the one that solves a problem the hiring manager recognizes." - Austin Belcak, Cultivated Culture **Real Example: Jamie, Accountant → Data Analyst** Jamie's Minimum Viable Skillset: 1. SQL (appeared in 100% of job descriptions) 2. Python basics (appeared in 80%) 3. Data visualization (Tableau or PowerBI - appeared in 75%) Month 2-3 timeline: - Weeks 5-8: DataCamp SQL + Python courses (4 hours/week) - Week 9: Built SQL queries analyzing Airbnb dataset - Week 10: Created Python script automating personal expense tracking - Week 11-12: Built Tableau dashboard analyzing local real estate trends Cost: $300 (courses + Tableau license) Result: Three portfolio pieces demonstrating SQL, Python, and visualization ## Month 4-5: Create Public Proof **Goal:** Make your credibility visible and discoverable. This is where most career changers fail. They do the learning and build the projects, then stick them in a folder on their computer. Hiring managers never see them. You need to make your work *public* and *searchable*. **Action Plan:** **Week 13-16: Document Your Work** - Create a simple portfolio website (use Webflow, Carrd, or even Notion) - Write 3-5 case studies showing your projects - Structure: Problem → Approach → Solution → Results → What You Learned - Include screenshots, code snippets, specific metrics - Goal: A hiring manager can see you can do the work in 60 seconds **Week 17-20: Teach What You're Learning** - Write 2-3 blog posts or LinkedIn articles - Topics: "How I solved [specific problem]" or "What I learned building [project]" - Not generic - specific, tactical, useful to others learning - Goal: Show up in Google searches for "[skill] + [your name]" **The Portfolio Piece Formula:** | Element | What to Include | Why It Matters | |---------|-----------------|----------------| | **The Problem** | Specific problem you solved (not "I built a website") | Shows you think about problems, not just tools | | **Your Approach** | What options you considered and why you chose this path | Shows decision-making and trade-off analysis | | **The Solution** | Screenshots, code, specific features | Proves you actually built it | | **Results** | Metrics if possible ("Reduced load time by 40%") | Shows you think about outcomes | | **Reflection** | What you'd do differently, what you learned | Shows growth mindset and self-awareness | **Real Example: Priya, Marketing → UX Design** Priya's portfolio piece: "Redesigning the Mobile Checkout Experience for [Local Coffee Shop]" She didn't wait for permission. She found a local business with a terrible mobile experience, redesigned it as a case study, and documented her entire process: - User research (interviewed 8 customers) - Wireframes showing before/after - Usability testing results - Final high-fidelity mockups She never built the actual product. The *process* was the proof of competence. Result: Her case study showed up on Google. A hiring manager searching for "UX designer [city]" found her portfolio. She got an interview request before she even applied. ## Month 6: Strategic Networking + Applications **Goal:** Get your portfolio in front of decision-makers. Most people network too early (before they have anything to show) or too late (after they've already been rejected). Month 6 is the sweet spot. **Action Plan:** **Week 21-22: Warm Outreach** - Reconnect with the people you interviewed in Month 1 (from "The 3-Interview Method") - Share your portfolio: "Remember when we talked in January? Here's what I've built since then." - Ask: "Do you know anyone hiring for [role]?" - Goal: Get warm introductions, not cold applications **Week 23-24: Targeted Applications** - Apply to 10-15 highly targeted roles (not 100 random jobs) - Customize every application with specific project relevant to that company - Include link to portfolio in resume, cover letter, and application - Goal: Quality over quantity - prove you can do *their* specific work **Week 25-26: Follow-Up Projects** - If you get to interview stage, build a mini-project specific to that company - Example: "I noticed your product has [problem]. Here's a mockup/analysis/proposal for how to solve it." - Send it as follow-up after interview - Goal: Prove you can add value from day 1 **Real Example: Marcus, Sales → Product Management** Marcus identified 12 companies with products he actually used. For each application, he: - Wrote a 1-page product improvement proposal specific to their product - Referenced it in his cover letter: "I use [Product] daily and built this proposal for how to improve [specific feature]" - Included it as a PDF with his application Result: 12 applications → 5 interview requests → 2 offers His "lack of experience" became irrelevant because he'd already proven he could do product thinking for *their specific product*. ## The Timeline at a Glance | Month | Focus | Time Commitment | Cost | Output | |-------|-------|----------------|------|--------| | 1 | Learn the Language | 5-8 hrs/week | $0-50 | Industry fluency | | 2-3 | Build Minimum Viable Skillset | 10-15 hrs/week | $200-2000 | 2-3 portfolio projects | | 4-5 | Create Public Proof | 8-12 hrs/week | $50-200 | Portfolio site + case studies | | 6 | Strategic Networking + Applications | 15-20 hrs/week | $0 | Warm intros + targeted applications | **Total investment:** 6 months, 10-15 hours/week, $250-2250 ## What This Actually Looks Like in Practice **Case Study: Sarah, Consultant → Tech Product Manager** Sarah's 6-month timeline: **Month 1 (January):** Subscribed to Lenny's Newsletter, Product Hunt, joined Product Manager HQ Slack. Completed 3-Interview Method with 1 ex-PM, 1 senior PM, 1 recent switcher. **Month 2-3 (Feb-Mar):** Took Product Management course on Maven. Built 3 product specs: 1. Feature proposal for habit-tracking app she used 2. Go-to-market plan for a friend's small business 3. Competitive analysis of meal kit services **Month 4-5 (Apr-May):** Created Notion portfolio with case studies. Wrote LinkedIn posts: - "How I'd improve Notion's onboarding (with wireframes)" - "What I learned building a product spec with zero PM experience" Both posts got 50+ reactions, 2 recruiter messages. **Month 6 (June):** Reached back out to the 3 people from Month 1. The recent switcher intro'd her to their former company. Sarah applied with a custom product proposal. Got interview. Used another custom proposal as take-home project. Got offer. Timeline: Started in January, offer in June, started role in July. Previous salary: $95k (consulting) New salary: $110k (PM at Series B startup) ## Your Next Step Map out your 6-month timeline starting today. Block the time in your calendar. Treat it like a part-time job. In Month 1, focus on learning the language. Don't skip ahead to building projects before you understand how the industry thinks and talks. Most career changers spend 12-18 months "exploring" and "preparing." This timeline gets you to credible in 6 months because it's systematic, not scattered. The question isn't whether you have time. It's whether you want to spend 6 months building credibility or 18 months wondering why no one's hiring you.
The 3-Interview Method: How to Research a New Field
By Templata • 6 min read
# The 3-Interview Method: How to Research a New Field You've spent weeks reading articles about your target industry. You've scrolled through hundreds of LinkedIn profiles. You've bookmarked 47 "Day in the Life of a [Job Title]" videos. And you still have no idea if this career is actually right for you. Here's why: **passive research doesn't reveal what you need to know.** Job descriptions tell you what companies want. LinkedIn profiles show polished highlights. Articles are written for clicks, not clarity. What actually works: The 3-Interview Method. Three conversations, in a specific order, that reveal what no amount of Googling can tell you. ## Why Three Interviews (and Why This Order Matters) Most people do informational interviews backwards. They talk to whoever will respond to their LinkedIn message, ask generic questions, and get generic answers. The 3-Interview Method is different. Each conversation serves a specific purpose, and the order is critical: **Interview 1: The Escaped** - Someone who LEFT your target industry **Interview 2: The Lifer** - 10+ years in the role, still there **Interview 3: The Recent Switcher** - Changed careers into this field 1-2 years ago > "People who stayed in an industry can't see its problems. You need the escaped to see what's broken, the lifer to see the unwritten rules, and the switcher to see the actual path." - Chris Voss, Never Split the Difference ## Interview 1: The Escaped (Find the Red Flags) **Who to find:** Someone who worked in your target industry for 3+ years and then left for a different field. **Where to find them:** LinkedIn search: "[Target Industry] AND [Current Different Industry]" - e.g., "former teacher AND product manager" or "ex-consultant AND nonprofit" **What they reveal:** The parts that break you. The reasons people quit. The realities that don't show up in job descriptions. **Questions to ask:** 1. "What made you decide to leave [industry]? Not the polished LinkedIn version—what actually broke?" 2. "What do people not understand about [industry] until they're in it?" 3. "If you could go back, what would you have known before starting?" 4. "What kind of person actually thrives long-term in [industry]? Be brutally honest." 5. "What's the thing everyone complains about but nobody mentions in interviews?" **Real Example: Sarah, researching tech consulting** Sarah interviewed someone who left consulting after 6 years. The conversation revealed: - 60-70 hour weeks are standard, not occasional - Promotion requires selling new projects, not just delivering current ones - You're expected to be "on" for clients 24/7 - The exit opportunities are real, but you need 3+ years to be credible This wasn't in any job description. Armed with this, Sarah could make an informed choice: the exit opportunities were worth 3 years of intensity, but she needed to save more money first (see "The Real Cost of Career Change"). ## Interview 2: The Lifer (Learn the Unwritten Rules) **Who to find:** Someone with 10+ years in your target role, still working in it, and seemingly successful. **Where to find them:** LinkedIn, industry associations, conferences, company websites (look for senior titles) **What they reveal:** The culture codes. How things actually work. What separates people who advance from people who plateau. **Questions to ask:** 1. "What do successful people in this field do in their first 90 days that sets them up for long-term success?" 2. "What's the unwritten rule about [specific aspect - e.g., networking, presentations, client management]?" 3. "Looking at your career, what skill or relationship was most valuable that you didn't expect?" 4. "What separates someone who gets promoted from someone who doesn't? Not the official criteria—the real difference." 5. "If someone's coming from [your current industry], what do they typically underestimate or overestimate?" **Real Example: Marcus, researching product management** Marcus interviewed a VP of Product who'd been in the field for 15 years. Key insights: - The first product manager job is the hardest to get. After that, it's much easier. - PMs who came from engineering got more respect initially, but PMs from other backgrounds often had better user empathy - The best way in: join a company in a different role (customer success, operations) and transition internally after 12-18 months - The skill that mattered most: saying no. "Product management is actually product *elimination*." This changed Marcus's strategy entirely. Instead of applying to PM roles cold, he targeted customer success roles at product-led companies with internal mobility paths. ## Interview 3: The Recent Switcher (Get the Actual Playbook) **Who to find:** Someone who made a career change into your target field within the last 1-2 years. **Where to find them:** LinkedIn search for people with 2+ different industries in their work history, focus on recent changes **What they reveal:** The actual path. What worked and what didn't. The tactical details of how they made it happen. **Questions to ask:** 1. "Walk me through your transition timeline. When did you start preparing, when did you start applying, how long until you got an offer?" 2. "What did you learn or build to make yourself credible? Be specific about courses, projects, portfolio pieces." 3. "What surprised you about the transition—both harder and easier than expected?" 4. "If you were doing this again today, what would you do differently?" 5. "What's one thing you wish someone had told you at the beginning?" 6. "How did you position your background in applications and interviews?" **Real Example: Priya, researching UX design** Priya interviewed someone who'd gone from marketing to UX design 18 months prior. The playbook: | Timeline | Action | Cost | |----------|--------|------| | Months 1-3 | Google UX Design Certificate + 3 practice projects | $234 | | Months 4-6 | Redesigned 2 products she actually used, posted case studies | $0 | | Month 7 | Started applying - 47 applications, 3 interviews, 0 offers | $0 | | Months 8-9 | Joined a startup as marketing, pitched UX projects internally | Took $15k pay cut | | Month 14 | Promoted to hybrid marketing/UX role | Back to original salary | | Month 18 | Moved to pure UX role at different company | +$22k from original salary | This was the playbook. Not theory—exactly what worked, with numbers and timelines. ## How to Actually Do This (The Tactical Guide) **Step 1: Identify Your Three People (Week 1)** For each category, find 2-3 people. You'll reach out to all of them because not everyone will respond. Use LinkedIn Boolean search: - The Escaped: "[Industry keyword] AND NOT [Industry keyword]" in current experience - The Lifer: "[Industry keyword] AND [Senior title]" - filter for 10+ years - The Switcher: Look for career changes in the last 2 years **Step 2: The Outreach Message** Don't send generic "pick your brain" messages. They get ignored. Use this template: *Subject: Quick question about [specific thing] (15 min)* Hi [Name], I noticed you [specific observation about their career - e.g., "moved from teaching to product management in 2023" or "spent 12 years in consulting before moving to nonprofit work"]. I'm researching a transition to [industry] and have a specific question about [one thing relevant to their experience]. Would you be open to a 15-minute call next week? I'm happy to work around your schedule. [Your name] **Why this works:** - Specific observation (shows you did research) - One specific question (shows you're not wasting their time) - 15 minutes (actually believable time commitment) - Flexible scheduling (makes it easy to say yes) **Step 3: The Conversation (15-20 minutes each)** - **Start on time, end on time.** Set a timer for 15 minutes. - **Ask your prepared questions.** Don't wing it. - **Take notes.** You'll forget 80% within a day. - **Ask for one referral:** "Is there someone else you think I should talk to who has a different perspective?" - **Thank them within 24 hours.** Short email, specific about what was helpful. ## What You'll Learn (That Google Can't Tell You) After these three conversations, you'll know: ✅ **The real downsides** (from The Escaped) - Can you live with them? ✅ **The success patterns** (from The Lifer) - Do you fit the profile? ✅ **The actual path** (from The Switcher) - Is it realistic for your situation? Compare this to reading 20 articles about "Is [Career] Right For You?" where the answer is always "it depends." ## Your Next Step This week, identify 2-3 people in each category. Send outreach messages to all of them. Your goal: complete all three interviews within the next 3 weeks. These 45 minutes of conversation will save you 6 months (or 6 years) of pursuing the wrong career. Most people skip this because it feels uncomfortable to ask strangers for time. But here's the thing: **people love talking about their career decisions.** You're giving them a chance to reflect and help someone else avoid their mistakes. The question isn't whether to do these interviews. It's whether you want to make a career decision based on Google searches or actual insider knowledge.
The Skills Transfer Audit: What Actually Carries Over
By Templata • 5 min read
# The Skills Transfer Audit: What Actually Carries Over Most career changers make the same mistake: they list every skill on their resume and hope something sticks. "I'm organized! I'm a good communicator! I can learn anything!" This generic approach gets your application rejected in 6 seconds—the average time recruiters spend on a resume. Here's what actually works: The 3-Layer Skill Stack framework that recruiters use to evaluate career changers. ## The 3-Layer Skill Stack Not all skills transfer equally. Understanding which layer your skills fall into determines your entire transition strategy. **Layer 1: Core Transferable Skills (80% Transfer Rate)** These are the skills that work everywhere, regardless of industry: - **Problem decomposition** - Breaking complex problems into manageable pieces - **Stakeholder management** - Managing expectations and communication across teams - **Project scoping** - Defining what success looks like and working backwards - **Data-informed decision making** - Using metrics to guide choices > "The candidates who succeed in career transitions are those who can articulate how they've solved problems, not just what tools they used to do it." - Laszlo Bock, Work Rules! (Former SVP of People Operations at Google) **Real Example:** Maria went from elementary school teacher to product manager. She didn't talk about "teaching kids" - she talked about "designing curriculum for 30 different learning styles simultaneously" (problem decomposition) and "communicating progress to parents with different expectations" (stakeholder management). She got 3 offers in 4 months. **Layer 2: Adjacent Skills (40-60% Transfer Rate)** These skills transfer, but need translation and often slight retooling: - **Industry-specific processes** - Your old industry's workflow might inform but not directly apply - **Technical proficiency** - Excel wizardry transfers between finance and operations, but needs context - **Regulatory knowledge** - Understanding compliance in healthcare won't directly help in tech, but the *approach* to navigating rules does - **Domain expertise** - Your 10 years in retail gives you consumer behavior insights valuable in e-commerce The key: Don't claim these transfer 1:1. Show how they *inform* your new role. **Layer 3: Non-Transferable Skills (10-20% Transfer Rate)** These are the skills you need to accept won't help much: - Specialized certifications (unless the new field requires similar ones) - Industry-specific tools that don't exist elsewhere - Deep technical knowledge that doesn't apply (e.g., medical terminology won't help in software) - Proprietary systems and processes > "Career changers fail when they try to force-fit old expertise into new contexts. The winners identify their 3-5 core transferable skills and get ruthlessly good at articulating them." - Jenny Blake, Pivot: The Only Move That Matters Is Your Next One ## The Transfer Audit: Your Action Plan **Step 1: List Everything (15 minutes)** Write down every skill, project, and accomplishment from your current career. Don't filter yet. Include: - Hard skills (tools, processes, certifications) - Soft skills (communication, leadership, analysis) - Projects you're proud of - Problems you've solved **Step 2: Categorize by Layer (30 minutes)** For each item, ask: "Would this skill work the same way in a completely different industry?" - If YES → Layer 1 (Core Transferable) - If "YES, BUT..." → Layer 2 (Adjacent) - If NO → Layer 3 (Non-Transferable) **Step 3: The 3-for-1 Translation (1 hour)** For each Layer 1 skill, write three different ways to describe it: | Old Context | Neutral Translation | New Context | |-------------|---------------------|-------------| | "Managed classroom of 30 students" | "Designed systems for 30 individuals with different needs and learning styles" | "Would manage product features for users with diverse use cases" | | "Processed insurance claims" | "Analyzed complex requirements against policy frameworks to make high-stakes decisions" | "Could evaluate customer requests against product capabilities" | | "Coordinated 15-person events" | "Managed cross-functional stakeholders with competing priorities and fixed deadlines" | "Ready to coordinate product launches across engineering, marketing, and sales" | The middle column is what goes on your resume. The right column is what you say in interviews. **Step 4: Identify the Gap (30 minutes)** Look at 5 job descriptions in your target field. What skills appear in EVERY posting that aren't in your Layer 1 or Layer 2? These are your **Minimum Viable Skills**—what you actually need to learn. Most career changers need 2-4 new skills, not 20. We'll cover how to learn these in "The Minimum Viable Skillset." ## The Reality Check: What This Looks Like **Case Study: David, Journalist → Data Analyst** David spent 12 years as an investigative journalist. Here's how he categorized his skills: **Layer 1 (Core Transferable):** - Finding stories in messy data (pattern recognition) - Interviewing sources to extract truth (stakeholder communication) - Meeting daily deadlines under pressure (time management) - Fact-checking across multiple sources (quality assurance) **Layer 2 (Adjacent):** - Writing compelling narratives (translated to: presenting data insights) - Understanding AP style (translated to: following documentation standards) - Source relationship management (translated to: stakeholder communication) **Layer 3 (Non-Transferable):** - Knowledge of libel law - Contacts in city government - Experience with specific CMS platforms David focused his resume on Layer 1 skills, mentioned Layer 2 as bonus context, and completely ignored Layer 3. He added SQL and Python (his Minimum Viable Skills) through a 12-week bootcamp. Result: Landed a data analyst role at a media company in 7 months. His journalism background became an *asset* because he could tell stories with data—once he learned to speak the language. ## What Most People Get Wrong **Mistake #1: "Everything I did transfers because skills are universal"** No. Your skill at "managing people" in retail (coaching cashiers on upselling) is different from "managing people" in consulting (developing junior analysts). Be specific about *what* you managed and *how*. **Mistake #2: "Nothing I did matters because I'm starting over"** Also no. If you've worked for 5+ years, you have Layer 1 skills. You just haven't identified them yet. Go back to Step 1. **Mistake #3: "I need to hide my old career"** Wrong approach. Your old career is evidence you can deliver results. The question is: can you *translate* those results into language your new industry understands? ## Your Next Step Complete the Transfer Audit this week. You'll use this as the foundation for: - Your resume (highlighting Layer 1 skills) - Your cover letter (translating Layer 2 skills) - Your interview stories (proving you can solve their problems) - Your learning plan (filling the gaps with Minimum Viable Skills) The audit takes 2-3 hours. It's the difference between "I'm starting over" and "I'm bringing proven skills to a new context." Most career changers skip this step and wonder why they're not getting interviews. Don't be most career changers.
Career & Work Planning Guides
Asking for a Raise
Build your case and negotiate compensation confidently
Difficulty: beginner
Contains 0 questions and 7 expert readings
Career Change
Transition to a new career field with confidence
Difficulty: intermediate
Contains 60 questions and 9 expert readings
Going Freelance
Build a sustainable freelance career
Difficulty: intermediate
Contains 56 questions and 0 expert readings
Job Search Strategy
Land your next role with effective search tactics
Difficulty: beginner
Contains 55 questions and 8 expert readings
New Leadership Role
Step into management with confidence
Difficulty: intermediate
Contains 55 questions and 0 expert readings
Recovering from Burnout
Heal from burnout and prevent relapse
Difficulty: intermediate
Contains 55 questions and 0 expert readings
Recovering from Layoff
Navigate unemployment and bounce back stronger
Difficulty: intermediate
Contains 55 questions and 8 expert readings
Remote Work Success
Thrive while working from home
Difficulty: beginner
Contains 40 questions and 0 expert readings
Starting a Business
Launch your business from idea to first customers
Difficulty: advanced
Contains 60 questions and 0 expert readings
Workplace Conflict
Resolve conflicts professionally and protect your peace